JP2019048217A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from getting bored with a game in an early stage.SOLUTION: Acquisition means acquires lottery information on the basis of an operation of operation means operable by a player. Determination means executes a determination on the basis of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. An operation performance display mode is displayed on display means when the determination means determines a specific result. Period setting means sets a validation period to validate the operation of the operation means. Probability setting means sets the probability that the determination means determines the specific result. Probability setting means determines the probability set by the probability setting means by varying it at a timing when the operation means is operated within a validation period set by the period setting means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with operation means (switches etc.) operable by the player and the player operates the operation means to change the effects of the game etc. It is done.

  In such pachinko machines, for example, there is a machine that executes a lottery to change the game effect when the operating means is operated, in order to perform various effects when the player operates the operating means. .

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741

  In this type of pachinko machine, the game effect is changed at a certain timing etc. by the operation of the player, and the player has a monotonous impression on the game, and the player gets bored early in the game. There was a point.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game early.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has main control means for executing control of the game and slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means. The main control means is a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the success / failure determination means for executing the game success / failure determination based on the establishment of the start condition and that the success / failure determination result is a predetermined result. A bonus game execution means for executing a game, the slave control means includes an operation means operable by the player, an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and the acquisition means A determination unit that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the user, a display unit that displays an operation effect display mode when the determination unit determines that the predetermined result is obtained, and the operation of the operation unit is validated. Set effective period Period setting means, probability setting means for setting the probability that the judgment means determines that the result is a predetermined result, and probability set by the probability setting means within one valid period set by the period setting means And probability determination means for changing and determining the timing according to the timing at which the operation means is operated.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising: counting means for counting the number of times the operation means has been operated within a valid period of 1 set by the period setting means; The probability determining means determines the probability as the predetermined result if the count value by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times when the probability is determined at the timing when the operation means is operated within one valid period. Is set higher than the probability determined based on the timing.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means.

  In the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is a predetermined result, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The probability that the determination means determines that the predetermined result is obtained is set by the probability setting means. The probability set by the probability setting means is changed by the timing at which the operation means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means, and is determined by the probability determination means.

  As a result, the probability of achieving a predetermined result is varied according to the timing of operation even within one valid period, so that random effects can be performed. Therefore, various effects of the game can be made, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the counting means counts the number of times the operating means is operated within the one effective period set by the period setting means. When the probability is determined at the timing when the operation means is operated within the valid period of 1, if the count value by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, the probability determined as the predetermined result is It is set higher than the probability determined based on it.

  Therefore, when the number of times the player operates the operation means is large, it can be felt that the operation effect display mode is easily displayed, and there is an effect that it is possible to have an interest by operating the operation means.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of SW production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of SW production displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a view schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (B) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the win in the special symbol, and (d) is a second random number counter C4 and the ordinary It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with the hit in a symbol typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process 3 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of SW production displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of RAM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment It is the figure shown and (c) is a figure showing typically the contents of the display lottery table in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of the comment selection table in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the indicator setting data in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selective processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the mission setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the opening display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the big hit game in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol in the big hit game in the fourth embodiment It is a figure showing an example of a round display mode displayed on a display. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) shows the content of the opening display mode selection table in 4th Embodiment typically FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the opening process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting presentation processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process during a demonstration screen display performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart which shows transition of the background mode in a 5th embodiment, (b) is a timing chart which shows transition of a background mode in a modification of a 5th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of RAM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment It is a figure shown typically, and (c) is a figure showing typically the contents of the background change lottery table in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the timing chart in case the SW production in 6th execution is executed. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 6th embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 6th embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of RAM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the figure shown clearly, (c) is the figure which showed typically the content of the maximum value selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize command reception processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the comment selection table in 7th Embodiment typically FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in an 8th embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in an 8th embodiment, and (c) is setting that SW production in an 8th embodiment is prohibited Is a timing chart in the case of It is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the opening process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 8 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of an opening display mode of a big hit game displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a modification of an 8th embodiment, and (b) is SW production in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 24C is a timing chart in the case of no SW in the eighth embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first) when the ball passes the second entrance 67. 2) The lottery will be held. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 , And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

  When it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", it becomes special game state (16R big hit) of 16 rounds in both, and if it is "big hit A", then the big hit ends as added value after the big hit end The pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the variation of the special symbol) until the next special symbol wins. Moreover, in "big hit B", the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol oddity), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal Indicates the condition (normal condition of special symbol). In addition, "time symbol of the ordinary symbol" (during the short period of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming state in which the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state", which indicates that the probability of hitting the symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

  Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol is referred to as a special variation state (probable change period) of the special symbol. In addition, during the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol after the big hit end of the special symbol, that is, between the end of the big hit B end until the lottery of the special symbol ends a predetermined number of times , It is referred to as a short period of time of the normal pattern.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are made common, depending on the type of the jackpot "time symbol The period of becoming a "state" is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or only a part of the type of jackpot may be changed. Also, for example, instead of changing the period in which the "time symbol of the normal symbol" is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64, or once The number of times of opening the motorized part may be changed in the hit of the normal symbol. Moreover, in this embodiment, after the big hit end, it becomes "high probability state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol", but after "high probability state of special symbol" is finished, "time symbol of normal symbol" "" May be configured.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the "big hit B" until the drawing of the special symbol is finished 100 times. The period may be set arbitrarily.

  It should be noted that while the "special symbol high probability state" is continued, when the special symbol big hit A is newly added, the "special symbol high probability state" is further added after the big hit of the new special symbol. It will be continued until the jackpot of the design.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, its big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) The special symbol (1st symbol) according to is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Moreover, if it is a "big hit A", the change display with which the main symbol to which "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" which is an odd number is added aligns is performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a combination of predetermined main symbols indicating a small hit (for example, on the effective line L1, a combination of main symbols from the left symbol row Z1 is "3" "4" “1”) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Continuing, with reference to FIG. 5, the display aspect of SW (switch) presentation performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5A is a view showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect in the present embodiment. The SW effect is selected and displayed as one of the notice display modes during the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern in which the main symbol for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is fluctuated. This SW effect is set according to the type of the selected variation pattern when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected, and is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. Ru. Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 is selected and set in the process of S1404 of the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 221.

  When the SW effect is set, the third symbol display device 81 imitates the frame button 22 while the variation pattern of the special symbol is being variably displayed (dynamically displayed), as shown in FIG. 5 (a). The symbol is displayed, and the character "SHIFT BEAT !!" is displayed to inform the player that the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, an indicator is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81, and based on the number of times the player presses the frame button 22, the memory of the indicator lights up and goes up, which is a scale of the maximum value " If the indicator rises (lights up) to the scale indicated as victory (see FIG. 5B), it indicates to the player that the special symbol in motion will be a big hit (predicting). In this case, the main symbol is reduced and is variably displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81 only with the number of the symbol.

  In addition, time to be displayed within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is determined in advance, and the SW effect is automatically changed to the display mode according to the fluctuation pattern of the main symbol when the time elapses.

  In the main controller 110, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), it is used as a trigger, a lottery of a special symbol is performed, and thereafter, the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37 The variable display of the symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the first symbol display device In accordance with the change display of 37, the change display of the third symbol is performed.

  I will explain the flow to the jackpot. When variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, high-speed variable display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) When has passed, it switches to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the stop display in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are aligned is performed, and the change effect is finished, and the big hit effect is subsequently started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the stop display where the main symbol (the third symbol) of the same number is not aligned is performed and the fluctuation effect is ended, and there is the start winning prize held. The next special symbol lottery is performed, and the next change presentation is started.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, or As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (5 round jackpot) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 18) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is special When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is the jackpot. In addition, this special symbol big hit random number table is for high probability of special symbol (period during the low probability state of special symbol) and high probability of high probability of becoming special jackpot from the low probability (special symbol) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "7" is the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability. . As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/30".

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 49” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. In addition, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 There is.

  In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, various kinds of "disappearing (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various, "disappearing special reach" "Various A, Big B, Big B C-common variation patterns are defined as" Shared Normal Reach "variety," Share Super Reach "variety," Shared Special Reach "variety, as a variation pattern for Big B A variety of “special reach” types are defined, and a variety of “common normal reach” types, “shared super reach types”, and “shared special reach types” are defined as variation patterns of hit / out-of-use sharing. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9 (d), the value of the random number corresponding to the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c (see FIG. 9 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device When the value of the second random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number which becomes the normal set by the random number per symbol table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (d), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 8, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 18), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and time It has a counter 203 e and other storage areas.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as the drawing of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Are added (see S404 in FIG. 13). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 11).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 11 and S405 in FIG. 13). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 14).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S703 in FIG. 15: No).

  The time saving counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203 e is zero. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203e is set to zero, and a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control unit 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot Be done. That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the value according to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many the value of the time-and-time counter 203 e is.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 11). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished, until the value of the time counter 23e becomes 0 (S217 in FIG. 11).

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-sinking counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol based on a random symbol table for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 14).

  The other storage area 203z is an area in which various data and the like necessary for other games are stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  An SW effect pattern table 222 a is stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. Also, in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an SW depression frequency counter 223e, and a performance counter 223f, an SW effective time storage area 223g, and other storage area 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1409 in FIG. 21). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the setting of fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 22). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 21) and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1707 in FIG. 22).

  The SW depression frequency counter 223 e is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is depressed. In the SW depression frequency counter 223e, SW effect is set, and a value larger than 0 is stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g, that is, 1 is added each time the frame button 22 is depressed during the SW effective time. Ru. Specifically, one is added in the process of S1606 of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, in the processing of S1602 and S1614, the initial value is reset to 0. The value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is configured to be mainly used for setting of the lottery probability in the SW effect, and the like.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter value used for lottery of effects performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, selection of effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is a counter value updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated to the initial value 0 when it is further updated after being updated to the upper limit value 198. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is added and updated one by one.

  The SW effective time storage area 223 g is a storage area for storing an effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be effective. When the SW effective time is stored, it is subtracted and updated based on the passage of time of the SW effective time. When the valid time indicating a value larger than 0 seconds is stored in the SW valid time storage area 223g, it is determined that the SW valid time is being stored.

  The other storage area 223z is a storage area in which various data and the like necessary for other games are stored.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 21) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 are omitted because they are already known.

<About control processing by main controller 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 10 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and then, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance port 67 A process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 18) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S211: Yes), of the two types of big hit of the special symbol (big hit A, big hit B), it is determined what the big hit type is (S212), big hit type If is a jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the high probability gaming state (probable variation) (S213). If the jackpot type is the jackpot B, then 100 is set to the hour / minute counter 203e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the present process is ended. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S216, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. Be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is a special symbol off (S211: No),
It is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217). ), End this processing. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in transition (S302). If it is in a definite variation (S302: Yes), whether the jackpot of the special symbol is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability The lottery result of is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 30 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the time of low probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. One of "7" is set as a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes these hits match, the special symbol is Determined to be a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first collision type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big hit of the 3 types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B and jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R big hit, a definite symbol variation), and it is in the range of "50 to 99" If there is, it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, low probability state of special symbol, 100 symbols for a short period of time of normal symbol).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach", and "disappearing special reach" are defined. As the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B · jackpot C common, various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach", etc. are defined, and as the variation pattern for jackpot C, "special" Various types of reach are specified, and various types of fluctuation patterns for hit and off-common use are defined as common normal reach, common super reach, and shared special reach.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the set stop type is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 18). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, for convenience of explanation, first, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described, and then, the delay prefetching process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), determines whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a starting winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 18) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on the values of the various counters acquired in the process of S406, the result of determination of the yes / no determination at the start of fluctuation is determined (S407). Here, the game state (certainly positive or normal) at the start of the change is determined to determine the result of the determination of the success or failure. It is determined whether the success or failure determination result executed in the process of S407 is a jackpot (S408). If it is determined that the success or failure judgment result is a jackpot (S408: Yes), a jackpot winning command is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure determination result is out of step (S408: No), an out winning combination command is set (S410).

  The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 18) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores the information in the prize information storage area 223a as prize information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602). If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-middle counter 203 e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S 608). The hour-time counter 203e is a counter indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203e is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203 e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 8 (b)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 8 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the current is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the motorized part is performed when the motorized part opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67, and when the ball passes. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the second ball entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained . Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance ball opening 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance ball opening 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (refer to FIG. 10), and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. In addition, the ball holding ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 11) or the start winning process (see FIG. 13) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning combination information command set in the start winning combination processing is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1005). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S625 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 14), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), the first symbol display is a variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 14), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up)

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 16 has been executed, so that the processing at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

<Control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 19, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1318 (see FIG. 20) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 20, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 20), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1318. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1318 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1318 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is performed (see S1317 in FIG. 20). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is performed, the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1204 to S1206 It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the process of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (effect) in S1302 to S1310, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1311, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1312 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. The frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process shifts to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1311). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311), the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1403). Thereafter, based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and the SW effect pattern table (222a), a scenario of SW effect is selected, and the SW effective time set in the scenario is set (S1404). After that, it returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of times of suspension N of the variable display in is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1409 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1409 is the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main controller 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1408, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), it is next determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1410). When the winning information command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). Here, in the winning information storage area 223a, winning information as to the result of determination as to whether the balls are held or not and the type of jackpot are stored for each holding ball.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that no winning command has been received (S1410: No), a process according to other commands is executed (S1419).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the fluctuation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1312). The variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 performs variation effect production The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (ie, off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S1506. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 21). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1505). In the process of S1505, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to the process of S1506.

  In the process of S1506, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1506). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1506: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1507), and then in S1407 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1508).

  In the process of S1509, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 23), first, it is determined whether the value stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g is a value larger than 0, that is, it is during SW effective time (S1601). It should be noted that this SW effective time indicates that it is a time to determine that the operation is effective when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. When it is determined in the process of S1601 that the SW effective time is not reached (S1601: Yes), the SW pressing frequency counter 223e is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1602). Thereafter, this process ends. The SW depression frequency counter 223 e is a counter value for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is depressed during the SW effective time. As described above, when the SW valid time is out, by resetting the SW pressed frequency counter 223 e to an initial value, it is possible to accurately count the SW pressed frequency during the SW valid time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the SW effective time is in progress (S1601: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area 223g is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (S1603). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1604). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1604 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1604: Yes), the SW effective time is acquired from the SW effective time storage area 223g (S1605).

  The value of the SW depression frequency counter 223 e is incremented by one and updated. Subsequently, a lottery probability setting process is executed (S1607). Here, in the lottery probability setting process (S1607), a process of setting the lottery probability in the lottery of the effect to be displayed based on pressing of the frame button 22 based on the current SW effective time is executed.

  Here, the lottery probability setting process (S1607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the lottery probability setting process (S1607). In the lottery probability setting process (FIG. 24, S1607), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is one second or less (S1701). If it is determined that the remaining SW valid time is one second or less (S1701: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/2 (S1702). Here, when the lottery probability is set to 1⁄2, the value of 0 to 99 among the values of the effect counter 223 f (0 to 199) is set as the winning value.

  It is determined whether the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 20 or more (S1703). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 20 or more (S1703: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/1 (S1704). Here, all the values of the effect counter 223f are set as the winning value. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1703 that the SW depression frequency counter 223e is less than 20 (S1703: No), this process ends.

  Next, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the SW effective time is not 1 second or less, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 2 seconds or less (S1705). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 2 seconds or less (S1705: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1⁄4 (S1706). Here, among the values of the effect counter 223f, values from 0 to 49 are set as the winning value. It is determined whether the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 10 or more (S1707). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 10 or more (S1707: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/2 (S1708). Here, the same process as the process of S1702 is performed. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is less than 10 (S1707: No), this process ends.

  When it is determined in the process of S1705 that the SW effective time is not 2 seconds or less (S1705: No), the lottery probability is set to 1/5 (S1709). Here, in the process of setting the lottery probability to 1⁄5, among the values of the effect counter 223f, values from 0 to 39 are set as the winning values. Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the remaining time of the SW effective time, the display mode is changed (in the present embodiment, the indicator shown in FIGS. A lottery probability is set to execute the lottery as to whether or not to raise. The lottery probability is set to increase the probability of winning as the SW effective time decreases. Thereby, when the frame button 22 is continuously operated during the SW effective time to raise the indicator shown in FIG. 5A, if there is a large remaining time of the SW effective time, the lottery probability of the win Is set low, the indicator can be difficult to ascend. On the other hand, when the SW effective time decreases, the winning lottery probability is set high, so that the indicator can be easily set to rise. Thus, the player can enjoy the effect of operating the frame button 22 by fully utilizing the SW effective time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the number of pressing times exceeds the predetermined number by the number of pressing of the frame button 22. It was configured to set a winning lottery probability high. As a result, for the player who continuously presses the frame button 22 in a short period of time, the hit probability is set high, and by operating the frame button 22 many times to the player, advantageous display is facilitated It can make you think. Thus, the player can enjoy playing a game by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the indicator is displayed while the special symbol is being changed, and the player operates the frame button 22 to raise the indicator, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), when the indicator is raised to the scale indicated as victory, an example of the SW effect of notifying the player that the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit is shown and described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a special symbol (third symbol) is set as a jackpot A, and a jackpot B is set as a symbol that is difficult to identify, and a jackpot is notified by becoming an alley. Thereafter, an effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 continuously for a fixed period is executed as to whether it is a jackpot A or a jackpot B, and a lottery is performed each time the frame button 22 is operated. If the player has won the lottery, it may be configured as a SW effect that informs the player whether it is a big hit A or a big hit B. Even in such a case, as in the present embodiment, by changing the lottery probability according to the SW effective time, the player can be made to produce an effect of pressing the frame button 22 by effectively using the SW effective time. it can.

  Furthermore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, since the lottery is performed each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the number of times the hit is determined to be hit can be made random. For example, it is determined to be hit 10 times. In some cases, it may be determined to be a hit on the first occasion, so that it is possible to perform an effect that gives the player unexpectedness. Therefore, various patterns can be enjoyed by the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When the lottery probability setting process (S1607) is executed, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired based on the lottery probability set in the process of the lottery probability setting process (S1607), and the lottery is executed (S1608). It is determined whether the lottery result is a hit (S1609). If the lottery result is out (S1609: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the success or failure determination result of the special symbol currently being changed is a big hit (S1610). If it is determined that the success or failure determination result is a big hit (S1610: Yes), it is determined whether one-shot notification is to be made (S1611). Here, it is determined that the value of the acquired effect counter is any of 0-5. When it is determined that one-shot notification is to be made (S1612: Yes), a display-use hit gauge effect command is set (S1612). Thereafter, the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is reset to 0, which is an initial value, and the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is reset to 0 (S1613). Thereafter, this process ends.

  In this way, the lottery for executing the effect is executed, and when winning, the lottery for one-shot notification is executed, and when the one-shot notification lottery is won, the indicator is raised to MAX and displayed The hit gauge effect command is set. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect that the indicator becomes MAX (see FIG. 5B) suddenly. As a result, since the player can be provided with a surprising effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1611 that the one-shot notice lottery is out (S1611: No), the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is equal to or more than the upper limit (30 times or more in this embodiment). It is determined (S1614). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is equal to or greater than the upper limit (S1614: Yes), the processing of S1612 is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 5B, the indicator is raised to the scale indicated by victory, and it is notified that the indicator is a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1614, when the SW pressing frequency counter 223e determines that the number is smaller than the upper limit (S1614: No), the process of S1615 is executed. Further, in the process of S1610, when it is determined that the result of the determination is out of step (S1610: No), the process of S1615 is executed. In the process of S1615, a display gauge effect command indicating the scale of the indicator corresponding to the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is set (S1615).

  In the present embodiment, the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223 e is set to 1 to 5 with 1 to 5 divisions 2 to 10 with divisions 2 to 10 to 3 divisions 16 to 19 with divisions 4 to 20 for divisions 20 to 29. Ru. In the present embodiment, the indicator is raised according to the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e, but the present invention is not limited to this, up to the scale before the big hit (scale 5 in the present embodiment), It may be configured to be raised one by one each time a winning of the SW effect is won. By configuring in this manner, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed can be set so that the scale rises at random. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a different effect pattern every time. In the present embodiment, the process executed by the display control device 114 is a known process, and thus detailed illustration and description will be omitted.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the value of the number of times the frame button 22 is depressed (SW depression number counter 223e) is equal to or more than the predetermined number when the SW effective time becomes equal to or less than the predetermined time. For example, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to extend the SW effective time. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. There is. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The SW lottery extension flag 223 h is a flag indicating that the SW valid time is extended and set. The SW lottery extension flag 223 h is set to off in the initial state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the process of S1636 of the lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, when the SW effective time is extended and set, it is set to ON. Also, it is set to OFF in the processing of S1620 and S1640 of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (FIG. 27, S1320).

Regarding Control Processing by Pachinko Machine 10 in Second Embodiment
Next, control processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is modified from the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the frame button input monitoring and effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) is changed to the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (FIG. 27, S1320) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1320). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (FIG. 27, S1320) in the second embodiment is a lottery probability setting process (FIG. 23) with respect to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. 24, S1607) is changed to lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630), and processes of S1620 and S1640 are respectively added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1602, when the SW effective time is 0, the process of S1620 is executed after setting the SW depression frequency counter 223e to 0. In the process of S1620, the SW extension flag 223h is set to OFF (S1620). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Further, when the process of S1606 is executed, the lottery probability setting process 2 is executed (S1630). The lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630).

  In the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less (S1631). If it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than 3 seconds (S1631: No), the lottery probability is set to 1/10 (S1632). Here, among the values of the effect counter 223f, values from 0 to 66 are set as the hit values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less (S1631: Yes), it is determined whether the SW lottery extension flag 223h is off (S1633). If it is determined that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is on (S1633: No), the processing of S1638 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1633 that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is off (S1633: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 30 or more (S1634). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is less than 30 (S1634: No), the processing of S1638 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1634 that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 30 or more (S1634: Yes), 5 seconds are added to the SW effective time set in the SW effective time storage area 223g. Setting (S1635). The SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to ON (S1636). A display effective time extension command is set (S1637). By this command, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the indicator is increased by the indicator showing the SW effective time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that the SW effective time is increased, and the indicator is turned to the right Displayed in different colors. The added amount is displayed on the indicator in a display mode different in color or pattern as indicated by b, so that the player can easily recognize that the SW effective time has been extended. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, on the third symbol display device 81, a character is displayed to notify the player that the SW effective time "additional service !!" is added and extended. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the SW effective time has increased.

  In the process of S1638, the lottery probability is set to 1/3 (S1638). Thereafter, this process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the SW valid time is 3 seconds or less, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is determined. If the SW valid time is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the SW valid time is extended. As a result, the player who frequently presses the frame button 22 extends the SW effective time and further increases the period for operating the frame button 22. Therefore, it is more fun to operate the frame button 22. Can. On the other hand, for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 very much, the SW effective time is not extended, and the SW effective time ends. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that matches the style of the player's game.

  In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is extended when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is equal to or more than the predetermined number, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In some cases, it may be set to be extended more than in the case of being dislocated. In this case, a lottery may be performed regardless of the number of SW depressions or at a predetermined lottery probability based on the number of SW depressions, and the SW effective time may be extended when the lottery is won. By configuring in this manner, even a player playing a game without operating the frame button 22 operates the frame button 22 in anticipation of whether or not the success or failure judgment result is a big hit by extending the SW effective time. You can do it. Therefore, the taste of the game can be further improved and the player can be more entertained.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. When the process of S1613 is executed, the process of S1640 is executed. In the process of S1640, the SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to OFF (S1640). Thus, by setting the SW lottery extension flag to OFF after the SW effect is ended, it is possible to suppress the problem that the SW effective time is extended many times.

  Next, lottery probability setting processing 3 (S1650) will be described as a modification of the second embodiment with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing lottery probability setting processing 3 (S1650) in the modification of the second embodiment. The lottery probability setting process 3 (FIG. 29, S1650) in the modification of the second embodiment is the same as the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630) in the second embodiment except that the process of S1637 is the process of S1657. has been changed. The processes of S1651 to S1656 and S1658 in lottery probability setting process 3 (FIG. 29, S1650) are the same as the processes in S1631 to S1636 and S1638 in lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630) .

  In the process of S1657, a variable command for display is set which instructs to set the SW effective time display to 1/5. Thereby, the display control device 114 changes the indicator of the SW effective time according to the decrease of the SW effective time, but the variable speed is set to 1⁄5. As a result, as in the second embodiment, the variable speed (decreasing speed) of the indicator indicating the SW effective time is set to a low speed without displaying the indicator to increase, and the player is extended the SW effective time Can recognize what happened.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 37, a pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the SW effect is displayed and the SW effect is ended, the remaining time of the SW effective time is added, It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to provide the player with a special effect (in the present embodiment, a mission effect in the present embodiment) set by the remaining time of the SW effective time in the SW effect of one cycle. . The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30 (a)-(b), an example of the display mode displayed on 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 by SW production of the pachinko machine 10 in this 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. In FIG. 30 (a), the SW effect in the third embodiment is set, and the comment (character) indicating the expectation of the special symbol being changed is displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 during the SW effective time. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of being displayed. At the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol schematically showing the frame button 22 and an indicator M capable of identifying the remaining time of the SW effective time are displayed. The part indicated by a of the indicator indicates the remaining time of the SW effective time. Further, on the left side of the display mode of the indicator M, a time indicator T indicating a totalization situation of remaining time of SW effective time when the frame button 22 is pressed and the SW effect is finished is displayed. The remaining time of the SW effective time is added, and the indicator is turned clockwise according to the added time.

  FIG. 30 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the mission effect is executed in response to the total value of the remaining time of the SW effective time reaching the upper limit value. When the remaining time reaches the upper limit value, the word "Mission Entry" is displayed, and the word "Let's reach with 7 minutes within 3 minutes !!" is displayed, which indicates the contents of the mission. Thereby, the player can recognize that the success / failure determination result of the special symbol will be a big hit when the reach display mode is set with seven symbols. The remaining time of the SW effective time is the time indicated by a displayed by the indicator M when the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is easy for the player to recognize how much SW effective time remains. It can be done.

  As a result, the player presses the frame button 22 at an early timing in order to end the SW effect while leaving the SW effective time as much as possible when the SW effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player participate more in the game, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
The electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the display lottery table 222c and the comment selection table 222d in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. And indicator setting data 222e are respectively added.

  The display lottery table 222 c is a data table for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect in the SW effect. FIG. 31 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the display lottery table 222c. The value of the effect counter 223f is allocated to each of the omission and effect of the effect drawing according to the success or failure judgment results of the special symbol during fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is configured so that it is easier to be judged as a hit than in the case of being out.

  The comment selection table 222d is a data table for selecting the display content of the comment preview (see FIG. 30A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the SW effect shown in FIG. 32A.

  The indicator setting table 222e is a data table for determining the display mode of the time indicator T corresponding to the total time of the remaining time of the SW effective time, as shown in FIG. 32 (b). A variable amount for changing the indicator display is set corresponding to the total remaining time. The color of the time indicator T is changed to the angle set by the indicator angle, and the total value of the remaining time can be recognized by the player.

  A remaining time storage area 223i and a mission flag 223j are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, respectively.

  The remaining time storage area 223i is a storage area in which the remaining time of the SW effective time is stored. When the comment notice is set and the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the remaining time of the SW effective time at that time is stored in the remaining time storage area 223i.

  The mission flag 223 j is a flag indicating that a mission effect is being performed. When the mission effect is set, this mission flag 223 j is set to on.

  The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a view schematically showing a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol at a normal time (other than the mission effect). For each variation pattern, the value of the effect counter 223f is set, and when the value matches the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, a comment notice that is SW effect is set. FIG.33 (b) is a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of a special symbol, when a mission production is set. Even when the mission effect is set, there is no substitute for the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern, and only the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be the mission effect content. During the mission effect, the SW effect is not selected.

<About control processing by voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In the control process executed in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is compared with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) with respect to the first embodiment. (FIG. 23, S1307) has been changed to frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (FIG. 36, S1340). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a command determination process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 2 (S1330). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) in the third embodiment differs from the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1402 to S1404 are deleted and the process of S1420 is added. It is done. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, variation pattern selection processing (S1420) which is one processing in command determination processing 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection process (S1420).

  In the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 35, S1330), first, the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON (S1421). It is determined whether the mission flag 223 j is set to on (S 1422). If it is determined that the mission flag 223j is on (S1422: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table for missions (see FIG. 33B) based on the received command (S1423) . Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1422 that the mission flag 223j is off (S1422: No), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S1424). Here, the fluctuation pattern is selected (extracted) from the fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223f, the advance notice of the SW effect is determined, and the SW effective time is set (S1425). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired effect counter 223f matches the value of the effect counter 223f set in the selected variation pattern, and if it matches, the comment notice that is the SW effect is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1340).

  In frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 36, S1340), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1661). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1661: Yes), it is determined whether the mission flag 223j is on (S1662). If it is determined that the mission flag 223j is on (S1662: Yes), the remaining time set in the remaining time storage area 223i is subtracted by the elapsed time (S1663). It is determined whether the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is 0 (S1664). If it is determined that the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is 0 (S1664: Yes), the mission flag 223j is set to OFF (S1665). On the other hand, if it is determined that the mission flag is off in the process of S1662 (S1662: No), if it is determined that the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is not 0 in the process of S1664 (S1664: No), finish this process.

  When it is determined in the process of S1661 that the SW effective time is not 0 (S1661: No), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1666). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1667). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1667: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1667 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1667: Yes), a display SW pressing command is set (S1668). By this command, the display control device 114 is notified that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the display mode displayed by the display control device 114 is changed.

  The remaining time of the SW effective time is stored in the remaining time storage area 223i (S1669). The comment to be displayed is selected from the comment selection table 222d (see FIG. 32A) based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the result of the pass / fail determination (S1670). A display comment display command is set based on the comment selected in the process of S1670. A comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the display control device 114 by this command, and the comment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223g is set to 0 (S1672). Thereafter, a mission setting process is executed (S1673), and this process is ended.

  This mission setting process (S1673) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this mission setting process (S1673).

  In the mission setting process (FIG. 37, S1673), first, it is determined whether the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is a value larger than 0 (S1731). If it is determined that the remaining time is a value greater than 0 (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining time is equal to or more than the upper limit (180 seconds or more in the present embodiment) (S1732). When it is determined that the remaining time is equal to or more than the upper limit (S1732: Yes), the time indicator T is set to MAX (S1733). The mission flag 223j is set to on (S1734). A display command indicating the display of the set indicator is set (S1735).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1732 that the remaining time is less than the upper limit (S1732: No), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired and the display lottery table 222c (see FIG. 31C) is executed. (S1736). It is determined whether the lottery result in S1736 is a hit (S1737: Yes), the processing of S1733 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the process of S1736 is out in the process of S1737 (S1737: No), the time indicator T based on the remaining time is set (S1738). Thereafter, the process of S1735 is performed, and the process ends. When it is determined in the process of S1731 that the remaining time is 0, the time indicator is set to 0 (S1739), and then the process of S1735 is executed.

  As described above, when the SW effect is executed, the remaining time of the SW effective time is added and stored at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the special effect is executed in that time. Furthermore, by executing the display lottery, by winning the display lottery even if the total remaining time does not exceed the upper limit value, an indicator indicating the total remaining time is displayed on MAX (maximum), and special effects are produced. Configured to be set. This display lottery, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), is set so that it is easy to be determined as a hit if the one that is to be a big hit is included in the pending storage, so a special effect (mission effect) By being executed, the player can be expected to become a jackpot. Therefore, it is easy to play a game so as to operate the frame button 22 with as much of the remaining SW effective time as possible, and it is possible to urge the player to participate in the SW effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of selection display modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 to select one of them. In this case, in order to prevent the frame button 22 from being operated continuously and not knowing what candidates were present other than the selected display mode, the frame button is displayed within a predetermined time after the selection display mode is displayed. When the selection operation is determined by the operation of the button 22, the selected display mode and the other displayed candidates are distinguished and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the form. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 38, in the opening display that is the start of the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment, the effect of the display mode for selecting the weapon used in the effect display in the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 38 (a) shows an example of a selection display mode of the weapon selected by the player in the opening display mode when the game is a big hit. In the present embodiment, in addition to the frame button 22, operation buttons (not shown) for enabling left and right selection operations are provided on both sides of the frame button 22. The operation button is electrically connected in the same manner as the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the frame button 22.

  In this embodiment, in the jackpot game, in the jackpot game, the effect to fight the enemy is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the round display during the jackpot game, and the jackpot type is the jackpot A when the hero wins the battle. An effect of notifying the player of is performed. The player can select the weapon used by the main character in the battle. In the example of FIG. 38A, three of a saber, a cannon and a dynamite are displayed, and a cursor indicating selection is displayed below it. When the operation button is operated, the cursor moves to the left and right to switch the selection of the weapon. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the weapon on which the cursor is displayed is selected.

  Here, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed at the start of the jackpot game, or when the frame button 22 is mistakenly pressed as the operation button, weapon selection is executed in a short time, There was a problem that it was not possible to know what was displayed in the other candidates. In such a case, for example, in the case where the expectation of being the jackpot A is set to be different depending on the type of the selectable weapon candidate, the display of the candidate is determined by the game It is very important information for the

  Therefore, when the selection is determined in a short time (within 1 second in the present embodiment) after the selection display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that they can be distinguished from the displayed candidates.

  With such a configuration, even if the player determines the selection in a short time without confirming the selection display mode well, it is possible to confirm what candidates have been displayed. In addition, since the candidate is not displayed when the player selects after taking a certain amount of time or more, the third symbol display device 81 can always display the candidate, which can prevent the inconvenience of becoming annoying. .

<Electric Configuration in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment, an opening display mode selection table 222 f is added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The opening display mode is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot. In this embodiment, in the opening display, as shown in FIG. 38A, the selection display mode of the weapon used for the battle effect in the jackpot game is selected as the opening display mode.

Regarding Control Process in Fourth Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, in the first embodiment, detailed processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process.

  In the jackpot game process (FIG. 40, S1004), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot start timing is not reached (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the large opening direction 65 is released (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65 is satisfied (S1107). The closing condition of the large opening 65 determines whether the opening time (30 seconds) has elapsed or whether ten large game balls have won in the large opening 65. If it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65 is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the large opening 65 is closed (S1108).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65 is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), this process is ended.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control processing in the fourth embodiment, the command determination processing (FIG. 21, S1311) is compared with the first embodiment, and the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 41, S1350) , S1307) has been changed to frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (FIG. 43, S1360). The other processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a command determination process 3 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S1350). In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 41, S1350) in the fourth embodiment, each process up to S1412 to S1413 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined in the process of S1410 that a winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1412). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1412: Yes), the opening process is executed (S1413). Thereafter, this process ends. This opening process (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S1413).

  In the opening process (FIG. 42, S1413), first, based on the value of the effect counter 223f, an opening effect display mode is selected from the opening effect display mode selection table 222f (see FIG. 39) (S1511). A display command indicating the selected opening effect display mode is set. The opening display mode selected on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed by this command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S1360).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 43, S1360), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1681). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1681: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1681 that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1681: No), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1682). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1683). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated within one second (S1684). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed within one second (S1684: Yes), a display command to display the selection candidate on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1685). On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed within one second (S1684: No), the processing of S1686 is executed.

  In the process of S1686, a display command indicating the candidate selected by the cursor is set (S1686). After that, the SW effective time is reset to 0 (S1687), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1683 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1683: No), it is determined whether the operation button (not shown) is operated (S1688). If it is determined that the operation button has been operated (S1688: Yes), a display command for moving and displaying the cursor in the direction corresponding to the operation is set (S1689). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1688 that the operation button 22 is not operated (S1688: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated within one second after the SW effective time is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the selection candidate displayed in the opening display mode. Is set as Therefore, even when the player mistakenly operates, it is possible to identify what is displayed in the selection display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a customer waiting effect process (S1305) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect process (S1305).

  In the customer waiting effect processing (FIG. 44, S1305), first, it is determined whether or not a demonstration screen display is being executed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1521). If it is determined that the demonstration screen display is displayed (S1521: Yes), processing during the demonstration screen display is executed (S1522). The process during demonstration screen display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this demonstration screen display processing (S1522).

  In the process during demonstration screen display (FIG. 45, S1522), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1531). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1531: Yes), display of the setting screen is set (S1532). A display command for notifying the display control unit 114 of the display of the set setting screen is set (S1533).

  Here, with respect to the battle effect that is displayed during the jackpot game, the setting screen is a button for operating the ground battle fighting in the background of the ground and the underwater battle fighting in the background of the sea as shown in FIG. And the frame button 22 to set according to the preference of the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a display mode that matches the player's preference during the jackpot game, and it is possible to further entertain the player. In addition, the effects can be diversified, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1531 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1531: No), the progress counter is incremented by 1 (S1534). Although the elapsed counter is not shown, it is a counter set in the other storage area 223z of the RAM of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is for counting the elapsed time since the demonstration screen is displayed. It is a thing.

  It is determined whether the elapsed counter is the upper limit value (five minutes in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the progress counter is the upper limit (S1535: Yes), the progress counter is reset to the initial value (S1536), and the setting of the battle effect is set to default (in this embodiment, ground battle). (S1537). A display command indicating the content set in the process of S1537 is set (S1538). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1535 that the progress counter is less than the upper limit value (S1535: No), this process ends. The elapsed counter is reset to 0, which is an initial value, when the setting of the demonstration screen is released.

  Thus, when the demonstration screen is set, the elapsed time is measured. Then, when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the setting set for the pachinko machine 10 is set as a default. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 determines that the game is over, and the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is reset by the frame button 22 to the default setting. Therefore, when a new player starts playing a game, the player can play the game in the state set by default, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, when setting is input to the pachinko machine 10, the setting screen is displayed based on pressing of the frame button 22 in the state of the demo screen, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to have a dedicated interface for setting.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated across a plurality of changes in a predetermined period is stored, and the background is set when the number becomes a predetermined number. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the mode is changed. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Regarding the Timing Chart of Mode Switching in the Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a timing chart in switching of the background mode using the frame button 22 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 (a) shows that the frame button 22 is 50 times between the number of times the special symbol changes 10 times to 20 times (after the initial setting is made) after the jackpot game or the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The timing chart in the case of changing a background mode from beach mode to underwater mode based on having been pressed is shown. In the configuration of the second embodiment, a lottery for a predetermined background change is executed at a timing when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 10 to 20 and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 50 times, When the lottery is won, the background mode is switched from the beach mode to the underwater mode. Even when the player loses the lottery, the lottery is executed again at the timing when the 51st time is pressed, and it is determined whether to change the background or not.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 46 (b) shows a modification of the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is counted while the number of times the variation of the special symbol is 10 to 20 times, and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the number of times the variation of the special symbol becomes 20 times. If the number of times the SW is pressed is 50 or more, the lottery for background change is executed, and if it is won, the mode is switched to the underwater mode, but if it is less than 50 times or if it falls out of 50 times or more The beach mode is configured to continue.

  The period for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed may be notified so as to be understood by the player, or it may be configured to draw a random period by lottery so as not to be understood by the player. Good. In addition, when the thing that becomes the big hit is stored among the result of the decision of the holding ball of special symbol being held, if you push the frame button 22 more than a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, the background mode is switched You may configure it. In addition, without notifying the jackpot A, jackpot B, it is difficult to understand whether the current state is a probability variation gaming state or a normal gaming state, and in a definite variation gaming state, in a predetermined period, The background mode may be switched when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times or more.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery to determine whether to switch the background mode is performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the background mode may be changed without fail if it is pressed a predetermined number of times or more.

  By configuring in this manner, by pressing the frame button 22 across a plurality of changes in the special symbol, the player is provided with information that is advantageous to the player, such as the result of determination of success or failure and the current gaming state. Can be configured to improve the taste of the game.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 110 are changed from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, a background change lottery table 222g is added to the first embodiment.

  The background change lottery table 222g is a data table for executing a lottery as to whether or not to switch the background mode. FIG. 47C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the background change lottery table 222g. The value of the effect counter 223f is allocated separately to change the background mode or not to change, depending on whether or not the winning prize information for the big hit is stored in the winning prize information of the holding ball stored in the prize information storing area 223a. ing. The probability of being drawn if the background is changed is set to a higher probability than when no information is stored in the case where information that becomes a big hit is stored in the winning information.

  As a result, when the background mode is changed, the player can play a game with expectation that what is to be a big hit is stored in the special symbol held. Therefore, by continuously pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to identify information on the result of determination of the acceptance ball's acceptance or rejection, so that the player may be reminded to join the game using the frame button 22. it can. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, a fluctuation number counter 223k and a background change counter 223m are respectively added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment.

  The fluctuation number counter 223k is a counter for counting the fluctuation number of the special symbol after the big hit game or after the power is turned on. The fluctuation number counter 223k is incremented by one and updated in the process of S1430 of the command determination process 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, based on having received the opening command, it resets to 0 which is an initial value. Also, when the power is turned on, an initial value of 0 is set in the initial setting.

  The background change counter 223m is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in a predetermined predetermined period (in the present embodiment, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 10 to 20). . The background change counter 223m is updated by adding 1 in the process of S1692 of the background change process (S1690 in FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. Although illustration is omitted, when an opening command is received, it is reset to 0 which is an initial value. When the power is turned on, an initial value of 0 is set by the initial setting.

Regarding Control Processing in Fifth Embodiment
Next, control processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is the command determination process 4 (FIG. 48, S1370), and frame button input monitoring / rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) Are respectively changed to frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (FIG. 49, S1380). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the command determination processing 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 4 (S1370). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 48, S1370) in the fifth embodiment has the process of S1430 added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the process of S1404 is executed, the value of the fluctuation number counter 223k is incremented by one and updated (S1430). As described above, since the value of the fluctuation number counter 223k is updated based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, it is possible to accurately count the fluctuation number of the special symbol.

  Next, referring to FIG. 49, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S1380) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S1380). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process 5 (FIG. 49, S1380) in the fifth embodiment is a background changing process (S1690) with respect to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. Has been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S1601 that the SW effective time is 0 (S1601), the background change process is executed (S1690). Here, this background change processing (S1690) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the background change process (S1690 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1691). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1691: Yes), the value of the background change counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S1692). It is determined that the value of the background change counter 223m is equal to or more than the upper limit value (50 or more in the present embodiment) (S1693).

  If it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (S1693: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223m is equal to or more than the upper limit (S1693: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired and the background is changed from the background change lottery 222g (see FIG. 47C). A lottery is executed (S1694). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S1694 is a hit (with background change) (S1695). When it is determined that the lottery result is out (no background change) (S1695: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1695: Yes), the corresponding background mode is set (S1696). In the present embodiment, since the background mode of the beach mode and the underwater mode is set, the other background mode different from the currently set background is set. A display command indicating the set background mode is set (S1697). The background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched by the display control device 114 by this command.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the determination result of the special symbol stored on hold from the prize information storage area 223a is discriminated, and the discrimination result straddles the variation of the plurality of special symbols. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the SW effect to be executed is executed. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About Setting SW Valid Time in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, setting of the SW effective time of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which the SW effective time is set when the special symbol is changing and the third holding ball is established in a state where two holding balls are stored. The judgment result of the third holding ball is a big hit, and the SW effective time is set over the fluctuation of the third holding ball special symbol from the fluctuation of the first holding ball special symbol. In addition to the setting of the SW effective time, the SW effect shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is set. As the SW effect, an indicator is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 52 (a), and the frame button 22 is depressed to perform an effect of raising the indicator.

  While the special symbol corresponding to the first holding ball shown in FIG. 51 is being changed, a display mode as shown in FIG. 52 (a) is displayed. In this case, the special symbol (third symbol) is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), even when the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the first holding ball has passed and the stop display is performed, the effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22 is continuously displayed. Ru.

  Thereafter, even when the change of the second holding ball shown in FIG. 51 is started, an effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (a). During this time, the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time is displayed by gradually decreasing. FIG. 53 (b) shows the display mode of the SW effect when the second holding ball is stopped and displayed. In addition, although mentioned later in detail, the rise limit of an indicator is defined for every change of each special symbol, and based on pressing of frame button 22, it is constituted so that it may rise and may be displayed.

  FIG. 54 (a) shows the display mode of the SW effect when the special symbol corresponding to the third holding ball shown in FIG. 51 is changing. When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the indicator is raised and displayed up to MAX, which is the maximum value, and the player is informed in advance that the success or failure judgment result is a big hit. Ru.

  As described above, in the configuration according to the present embodiment, the SW effect is displayed across the variations of the plurality of special symbols, and therefore discouraging discouragement against the variation of the special symbols out of which the determination result is false Then, it can be expected to have a jackpot against the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, since the SW effect is set across a plurality of changes, the SW effect can have a margin, and various effects can be performed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a display lottery table 222c and a maximum value selection table 222h are added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in addition to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. There is.

  Since the display lottery table 222c (see FIG. 31C) has the same configuration as that described above in the third embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The maximum value selection table 222h is a selection table for setting the maximum value of the indicator of each variation in the SW effect. FIG. 55 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the maximum value selection table 222h. The scale of the maximum value is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f for each variation in accordance with the result of the determination.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a SW effect flag 223n is added to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The SW effect flag 223 n is a flag indicating that the SW effect is set. The SW effect flag 223n is set to ON when the SW effect is set in the processing of S1458 in the winning command reception process (S1450 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. Be done. In addition, it is set to off in the process of S1740 of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530).

  The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Control Process in Sixth Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. FIG. In the sixth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the frame button in the command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) in the first embodiment. The input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) is changed to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the command determination process 5 (S1390) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 5 (S1390). The command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) in the sixth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1411 is changed to the process of S1450. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, winning command reception processing (S1450) which is one of command determination processing 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process (S1450).

  In the winning command reception process (FIG. 57, S1450), first, winning information of the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1451). It is determined whether the SW effect flag 223 n is on. If it is determined that the SW effect flag 223n is on (S1452: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effect flag 223n is off (S1452: No), whether the number of holding balls is three or more, and whether the first holding ball and the second holding ball pass / fail judgment result It discriminates (S1453). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is less than 3 or at least one of the first holding ball and the second holding ball is a big hit (S1453: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1453 that the holding balls are three or more and the first holding balls and the second holding balls are out of judgment (S1453: Yes), the effect counter 223f The value is acquired, and the SW lottery of whether or not the SW effect is to be executed is executed from the display lottery table 222c (S1454). In the process of S1454, it is determined whether the lottery result is a hit (S1455). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit, the SW effective time corresponding to the holding ball that has become compatible with the SW effect is set (S1456). A display command for the selected SW effect is set (S1457). The SW effect flag 2233 n is set to on (S1458). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1455 that the lottery result is out (S1455: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, when a winning command indicating that a holding ball has been established is received, a SW effect is set across a plurality of variations based on the number of holding balls and the result of determination of whether they are reserved or not. . As a result, the player can enjoy a plurality of changes as one effect, and the result of the judgment on the acceptability is out of view, and the change of the special symbol can also be enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the SW effect is set when the holding balls are three or more balls. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and two or one holding balls may be used. By configuring in this way, even with a small number of holding balls, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of variations as one effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 6 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 6 (S1530). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530) in the sixth embodiment is the same as the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment in S1707, S1740, and S1750. Each process is added, and the processes of S1610 to S1615 are deleted.

  After the process of S1602 is performed, the process of S1740 is performed. In the process of S1740, the SW effect flag 223n is set to OFF (S1740). After the process of S1606 is performed, the process of S1707 is performed. In the process of S1707, it is determined whether the indicator of the SW effect currently displayed is rising to the maximum value set for fluctuation (S1707). If it is determined that the indicator has the maximum value (S1707: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the indicator is not the maximum value, the processing of S1607 is executed.

  When it is determined in the process of S1609 that the lottery result is a hit (S1609: Yes), the value of the indicator is set based on the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e, and the display showing the indicator is displayed A gauge effect command is set (S1750).

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time causes the instruction display mode s indicating the pressing timing of the frame button 22 to be displayed to the player. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to execute an effect for instructing the timing of pressing. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60, the display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the SW effect of this embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 displays a symbol schematically showing the frame button 22, and the position where the indicator M shows the indication display mode s to the player "stop the indicator in a circle !!" A display mode is displayed that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 at the changed timing. In this case, the special symbol is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right of the display area.

  The indicator M is the left area a of the indication display area s (the remaining time of the SW effective time is smaller than that of the indication display area s), the indication area b corresponding to the inside of the indication display area s, and the right area c of the indication display area s ( The remaining time of the SW effective time is longer than that of the instruction display area s. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is determined which area the indicator M corresponds to, that is, which area the remaining time of the SW effective time corresponds.

  FIG. 59 (b) is a display mode showing an example when a comment display is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed in the instruction area b. When the frame button 22 is pressed in the instruction area b, comment contents having a higher expectation to the jackpot than the other display areas are selected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60A, in the SW effect, when the indicator M approaches the vicinity of the instruction display area s, an enlargement effect is displayed in which the instruction display area is enlarged and displayed. As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the indicator M is enlarged and displayed as compared to the normal time, and the variable speed of the indicator M is also set slower than the normal time. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the indicator M is located in the instruction display area, the characters “PLEASE !!” are displayed to guide the player to press the frame button 22. As a result, the player can further press the frame button 22 at the timing when the indicator M is changed into the instruction display area s. Further, in the present embodiment, this enlargement effect is more easily selected than in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol in the variable display is a big hit, so the SW effect has an expectation of a big hit more Can be enjoyed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in the Seventh Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, a display lottery table 222 c and a comment selection table 222 d are respectively added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The display lottery table 222c has the same configuration as that described in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The comment selection table 222 d is a data table for selecting a comment of SW effect. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), comment content is set for each left side area a (a zone), designated area b (b zone) and right side area c (c zone). In addition, the presence or absence of the enlargement effect is set for each SW effect.

<Regarding Control Processing in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the frame button in the command determination process 6 (FIG. 62, S1560) in the first embodiment. The input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) is changed to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 7 (FIG. 63, S1550). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the command determination processing 6 (S1560) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 6 (S1560). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 62, S1560) in the seventh embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1404 is changed to the process of S1460. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the processing of S1403, the processing of S1460 is performed. In the process of S1460, the SW effect is selected from the comment selection table 222d (see FIG. 61B), and the corresponding SW effective time is set (S1460).

  Next, referring to FIG. 63, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 7 (S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 7 (S1550).

  In frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (FIG. 63, S1550), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1551). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1551: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1551: No), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1552). A display command corresponding to the SW effective time is set (S1553). This command changes the indicator M based on the remaining time of the SW valid time.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1554). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1554: Yes), a comment corresponding to the current SW effective time is set (S1555). Here, the corresponding comment is selected based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed from the comment selection table 222 d. A display command indicating the set comment is set (S1556).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1554 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1554: No), it is determined whether the effect is with enlargement (S1557). If it is determined that the effect is with enlargement (S1557: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to execute the enlargement effect (S1558). If it is determined that it is time to execute the enlargement effect (S1558: Yes), a display command indicating the enlarged display is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect is not for enlargement (S1557), and when it is determined that it is not the timing for the enlargement effect (S1558: No), this process ends.

  As described above, the player displays the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time, and uses the indicator M to instruct the player the pressing timing of the frame button 22, whereby the player can display the frame button 22. You can enjoy the game you used more. Furthermore, when the player can operate the frame button 22 at the timing instructed by the player, the player is more likely to be given a display mode (game value) higher in value than the normal, so the player is more instructed It is possible to play a game aiming to press the frame button 22 at the timing when it is done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect such that the indicator M is enlarged is performed, the player is not changing even for the player who does not press the frame button 22 even if the display by the SW effect is performed. It is possible to inform the degree of expectation for the success or failure judgment result of special symbol. Therefore, the taste of the game can be further improved.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70, a pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the battle effect is executed in the round display mode during the big hit game, and the player normally performs the frame button 22 in the 15th round display mode if it is normal. Although the SW effect to be pressed is displayed, in the opening display mode, by pressing the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times, the SW effect of the 15th round can be set so as not to be set in the first embodiment. This is different from the pachinko machine 10. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65, a display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing an opening display mode indicating that the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, the player is informed by a battle effect whether the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the round display mode of the 15th round, a display mode for instructing the player to operate the frame button 22 is displayed. Then, when the player presses the frame button 22, a display mode in which the outcome of the battle effect is determined is displayed, and when the main character wins the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the jackpot A of the 16th round which is the final round. The display mode which shows that it is is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the player presses the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times or more during the opening display mode shown in FIG. 64 (a), as shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the 15th round display mode, the SW effect is displayed. It is not displayed, but a display mode indicating an explosion is displayed, and then a display mode for reporting the outcome of the battle effect is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a display mode for notifying the jackpot type in the final round is displayed.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to set the player who does not like the SW effect to prohibit the SW effect from being displayed by operating the frame button 22 at the start of the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect more tailored to the player. Further, in the opening display mode, since the display mode such as the setting can not be displayed but can be set by the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to provide the player with the fun for the player to find out the setting not notified. A player can be made to play a game.

  FIG. 65C shows a timing chart of the setting for prohibiting the SW effect in the present embodiment. When the period of the opening display mode is started, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is counted. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22 30 times or more, the setting of the SW effect set in the 15th round is prohibited.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a skip flag 223p of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The skip flag 223 p is a flag indicating that the setting of the SW effect of the 15th round is set to be prohibited in the battle effect during the big hit game. This skip flag 223p is displayed during the opening display of the big hit game in the process of S1589 of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 8 (FIG. 70, S1580) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment. When the frame button 22 is pressed 30 times or more, it is set to ON. Although illustration is omitted, it is set to off based on the end of the jackpot game.

<Control Process by Pachinko Machine 10 in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is the command determination process 7 (FIG. 67, S1570), and frame button input monitoring / rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) Are respectively changed to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (FIG. 70, S1580). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the command determination process 7 (S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 (S1570). In the command determination process 7 (FIG. 67, S1570) in the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1412, S1414, S1470, and S1480 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. There is. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S1410 that no winning command has been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1412). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1412: Yes), the opening process 2 is executed (S1470). Thereafter, this process ends.

  The opening process 2 (S1470) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the opening process 2. In the opening process 2 (FIG. 68, S1470), first, the SW effective time is set to 30 seconds (S1471). A display command instructing opening display is set (S1472). Thus, the SW effective time is set along with the execution of the opening process. The SW effective time set in this case is 10 seconds. In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is 10 seconds, which is the length of the opening display mode. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be a partial length of the opening display mode. Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the period which presses and sets frame button 22 by an opening display mode, it is not restricted to it, 1st round may be sufficient, and another round may be sufficient.

  Also, for the player who is playing by pressing the frame button 22 before the start of the 15th round and before the 15th SW effect is displayed, the SW effect is not displayed. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the SW effect from becoming meaningless to the player.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1412 that the opening command has not been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether a round command has been received (S1414). If it is determined that a round command has been received (S1414: Yes), a round process is performed (S1480), and then this process ends.

  Here, the round process (S1480) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this round processing (S1480).

  In the round process (FIG. 69, S1480), first, it is determined whether the received round command is a command indicating the 15th round (S1481). If it is determined that the command indicates the 15th round, it is determined whether the skip flag 223p is off (S1482). If it is determined that the skip flag 223p is off (S1482: Yes), a 15-round display mode with SW effect is set (S1483). Then, the SW effective time corresponding to the display mode is set. A display command corresponding to the set display mode is set (S1485).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1482 that the skip flag 223p is on (S1482: No), a 15-round display mode without SW effect is set (S1486). Thereafter, the process of S1485 is executed to end this process. When it is determined in the process of S1481 that the received round command is a command other than the 15th round (S1481: No), a round display mode corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1487). Thereafter, the process of S1485 is executed to end this process.

  As such, by setting the skip flag 223p to ON, round display without setting of the SW effect is set. Therefore, the player can prohibit the setting of the SW effect by operating the frame button 22 in the opening display mode, and can provide the player with the effect according to the player's preference.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (S1580) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (S1580).

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (FIG. 70, S1580), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1581). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1581: Yes), the SW depression frequency counter is set to 0 (S1582), and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 0 (S1581: No), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1583). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1584). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1584: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1584: Yes), the value of the SW pressing frequency counter 223e is incremented by one and updated (S1585). It is determined whether the opening display is in progress (S1586). If it is determined that the opening display is being performed (S1586: Yes), it is determined whether the number of SW depressions is 30 or more (S1587). If it is determined that the number of times the SW is pressed is 30 or more (S1587: Yes), the skip flag 223p is set to ON (S1588), the SW valid time is reset (S1589), and this process is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times the SW is pressed is less than 30 times (S1588: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1586 that the opening is not being displayed (S1586), an effect to be displayed is selected based on the jackpot type (S1590). A display command indicating the selected effect is set (S1591). The SW effective time is reset (S1592), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the SW effect is displayed, the player performs the predetermined operation using the frame button 22 at the timing before the SW effect is performed, thereby prohibiting the display of the SW effect ( It can be canceled. Therefore, the player can set an effect according to the player's preference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening display mode, it is configured to set the display and non-display of the SW effect by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When a SW effect is selected for a pattern etc., the display of the SW effect is prohibited (display or non-display setting) by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 before the SW effect is displayed. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to execute effects tailored to the player.

  Next, a modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing an opening display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the player operates the operation button (not shown) configured with the cross key to move the cursor displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the BGM is output during the big hit game. Select the type of

  Here, also in the present embodiment, the display mode of the battle effect is displayed during the jackpot game as the round display mode as in the above-described eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed in the opening display mode and the type of BGM is selected, the SW effect of the 15th round is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71C, in the opening display mode, when the player does not select BGM, the SW effect of the 15th round is not set. As described above, by setting the presence or absence of the SW effect by the operation in the opening display mode, it is possible to display the effect according to the player's preference. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting of the SW effect can be performed without displaying the dedicated display mode for setting the SW effect, the setting screen and the like, so that the control load can be reduced. In addition, by displaying such a setting screen, it is possible to suppress a problem in which an effect or the like during a big hit is interrupted.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect has been described as an example, but it may be configured such that such a setting can be made by the effect of the variation pattern of the special symbol or the notice effect selected accompanying it. .

<Other Embodiments>
Next, other embodiments will be described. In the above-described embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured by a press-type switch. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the frame button 22 is changed to the following configuration. A touch sensor type liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) is disposed on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. Cover the liquid crystal display with a transparent clear cover made of resin. The clear cover is pivotally supported at one end on the gaming machine side, and an elastic member with the clear cover biased upward is disposed at the other end side, so that the upper tray can be slightly moved up and down. It is fixed to By pressing the upper portion of the clear cover, the clear cover is configured to approach the liquid crystal display device side. Then, when the clear cover is pressed and moved downward, the transmission type detection switch is arranged to be turned on. The detection switch is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured such that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can determine that the clear cover has been pressed. In addition, the display control of the liquid crystal display device is controlled by the display control device 114. Furthermore, the input signal of the touch sensor provided in the liquid crystal display device is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 81 is displayed on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, and the clear cover that covers the liquid crystal display device 81 functions as a button.

  By configuring in this manner, the liquid crystal display device can be provided not only in the third symbol display device 81 but also in the upper tray 17. By configuring the liquid crystal display device to be a button, the upper tray 17 can be provided. The liquid crystal display device and the frame button can be provided in a space-saving manner by utilizing the above space.

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the clear cover is pressed to approach the liquid crystal display device, the touch sensor can detect the finger or the like of the player pressing the clear cover or the clear cover. With such a configuration, pressing of the clear cover can be detected without providing a detection switch for detecting the clear cover. In addition, with regard to the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 81, it is possible to perform an operation such as selecting by touching over the clear cover, and it is possible to improve the playability of the game. Here, by allowing the touch operation of the liquid crystal display device only when the clear cover is pressed, it is possible to suppress the problem that the touch operation is performed when the player does not intend.

  Further, by notifying the liquid crystal display device 81 of the timing (effective time) of pressing the clear cover or displaying an effect by pressing the clear cover, the game property can be further improved. In addition, by displaying the history of jackpots, the reliability of the notice, etc., the special symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if it can not be displayed during the game, it is displayed on this liquid crystal display device. It can be confirmed. Therefore, various information can be confirmed without stopping the firing of the game ball and interrupting the game. Further, by displaying the cross key or the like on the liquid crystal display device, the cursor or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be moved by the touch operation. Therefore, not only the pressing operation but also the selecting operation can be performed in a space saving manner.

  Furthermore, since the liquid crystal display device is covered with the clear cover, the liquid crystal display device can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, since the functions of the liquid crystal display and the frame button are combined, the player can be disposed at the most easily viewable position. Also, by being displayed on this liquid crystal display device, it is possible to enjoy the effect without hesitation to the left and right players etc. (it is difficult to be overlooked).

  Next, the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) will be described. When it is an effect that the clear cover (frame button) is pressed, the characters "PUSH" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and it is informed that it is the timing (effective time) to press the clear cover. Then, when the clear cover is pressed, the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. The contents displayed here are displayed in the same manner as the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at that time. Then, effects and the like by pressing the clear cover in the remaining display areas are displayed.

  With this configuration, pressing the clear cover (frame button) suppresses the problem that the line of sight moves to the clear cover and the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are overlooked it can.

  Although the content of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in part of the display region of the liquid crystal display device in the above description, it may be displayed in the entire display region.

Next, a modification of the configuration of the frame button 22 will be described. A frame button is an unemployed transparent sphere structure, and a projection means for projecting an image inside the sphere is disposed below the sphere. The projection means is constituted by a projector or the like, and can display an image which looks three-dimensionally from the outside of the sphere. Also, the sphere is
Both ends are pivotally supported so that the player can rotate the sphere.

  In addition, the spheres are colored hemispherically in green transmission color and purple transmission color, and when the player is rotated, the amount of rotation is known. In addition, it has a detection sensor which detects the amount of rotation, and by rotating the sphere, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display mode displayed inside the sphere can be varied. It is configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, both ends of the sphere are pivotally supported to be rotatable, but the sphere is put into a case body that is rotatably fixed and is rotated in various directions like a track ball. May be possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to rotate the ball by hand. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be automatically rotated by a motor or the like. With this configuration, the degree of expectation can be notified by the rotation of the sphere, and the display mode of the display mode displayed inside the sphere can be changed. Moreover, as a structure which can push down a spherical body, you may comprise so that it can utilize as a frame button.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may integrate each apparatus 113,114 instead, and may provide them as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the voice lamp control unit 113 instructs the display control unit 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Further, all or a part of the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be combined.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means includes an operation means operable by the player, an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation of the operation means, and a determination means for performing determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means A display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when it is determined that the determination means has a predetermined result, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and a predetermined means by the determination means result The probability setting means for setting the probability to be determined and the probability set by the probability setting means are variably determined according to the timing at which the operation means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means A game machine A1 characterized by having probability determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is a predetermined result, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The probability that the determination means determines that the predetermined result is obtained is set by the probability setting means. The probability set by the probability setting means is changed by the timing at which the operation means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means, and is determined by the probability determination means. As a result, the probability of achieving a predetermined result is varied according to the timing of operation even within one valid period, so that random effects can be performed. Therefore, various effects of the game can be made, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A1 includes counting means for counting the number of times the operating means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means, and the probability determining means performs the operation within one valid period. When the probability is determined at the timing when the means is operated, if the count value by the counting means is a predetermined number or more, the probability determined as the predetermined result is higher than the probability determined based on the timing A game machine A2 characterized by being set.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the counting means counts the number of times the operating means is operated within the one effective period set by the period setting means. When the probability is determined at the timing when the operation means is operated within the valid period of 1, if the count value by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, the probability determined as the predetermined result is It is set higher than the probability determined based on it. Therefore, when the number of times the player operates the operation means is large, it can be felt that the operation effect display mode is easily displayed, and there is an effect that it is possible to have an interest by operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a gaming machine A3 characterized in that the effective period is set by combining periods having different probabilities determined by the probability determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the effective period is set by combining the periods in which the probabilities determined by the probability determining means are different from one another. There is an effect that the probability can be changed and set depending on the timing at which the user operates the operation means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a non-probability period in which the probability determining means does not have a probability of becoming a predetermined result based on the operation of the operating means in the effective period. The game machine A4 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the operation means is operated, the probability determination means sets the non-probability period in which the probability that there is no probability of becoming a predetermined result is set as the effective period. There is an effect that it can be operated.

  In any one of the gaming machine A1 to the gaming machine A4, the probability determining means sets the probability of being determined as a predetermined result to be higher as the remaining period of the effective period decreases. .

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the remaining period of the effective period decreases, the probability that the predetermined result is determined is set higher by the probability determining means. As a result, the player can be made to operate the operation means until the effective period is reduced, and there is an effect that the game can be played using the operation means.

<Feature B group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means includes an operation means operable by the player, an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation of the operation means, and a determination means for performing determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means A display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when the determination means determines that the predetermined result is obtained, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and the operation means being operated , Said Based on the storage means for storing the remaining period of the effective period when it is determined to be a fixed result, and the total value of the remaining period stored in the storage means being equal to or more than a predetermined value, A game machine B1 comprising: special effect means for displaying on display means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is a predetermined result, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The operation means is operated, and the remaining period of the effective period when it is determined that the predetermined result is stored by the storage means. The specific effect is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means based on the fact that the total value of the remaining periods stored in the storage means has become equal to or greater than the predetermined value. As a result, when the player sets the valid period, the player can store the remaining remaining valid period by operating the operation means at an earlier timing and setting the result as the predetermined result. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an interest by operating the operation means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the main control means acquires acquisition means for acquiring the propriety determination information for which the propriety determination is executed by the propriety determination means based on establishment of the acquisition condition, and the propriety determination information acquired by the acquisition means Means for storing the pass / fail judgment information storing means for storing the pass / fail judgment information stored in the pass / fail judgment information storage means, and the pass / fail decision means for deciding upon the pass / fail Prior signal generation means for generating a prior signal for notifying the secondary control means of the determination result, and the specific effect means, based on the prior signal, outputs a predetermined result to the acceptance determination information storage means Even when the total value stored in the storage unit is less than the predetermined value based on the determination that the corresponding determination information is stored, the specific effect is displayed on the display unit Gaming machine B2, characterized in that is for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the acquisition condition, the success / failure determination information is acquired by the acquisition means in which the success / failure determination means is executed. The pass / fail judgment information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the pass / fail judgment information storage means. The success / failure determination information stored in the success / failure determination information storage unit is determined by the priori failure determination unit before the start condition is established. An a priori signal generation means is generated by the a priori signal generation means for notifying the secondary control means of the success or failure judgment result by the priori success or failure judgment means. Even when the total value stored in the storage unit is less than the predetermined value based on the determination that the success / failure determination information as the predetermined result is stored in the success / failure determination information storage unit by the advance signal, the specific effect Is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means. Thereby, the player can expect a predetermined result by the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game expecting a more specific effect to be displayed.

  In the game machine B1 or B2, a game machine B3 characterized in that the specific effect is displayed over a period in which a plurality of acceptance / rejection determination results are indicated.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific effect is displayed over a period in which a plurality of acceptance determination results are indicated, so the player is determined Can be easily determined as one success / failure determination result, and it is possible to provide fresh effects.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, a game machine B4 characterized in that the specific effect is displayed in a display time corresponding to the total value stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B1 to B3, a specific effect is displayed in the display time corresponding to the total value stored in the storage means, so the player is stored in the storage means There is an effect that the total value of the remaining period of the effective period can be recognized.

<Feature C group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means includes an operation means operable by the player, an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation of the operation means, and a determination means for performing determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means A display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when the determination means determines that the predetermined result is obtained, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and the operation means being operated , Said Specific effect means for displaying a specific effect on the display means based on the storage means for storing the elapsed period of the effective period when it is determined to be a fixed result, and the total value of the elapsed periods stored in the storage means And a game machine C1 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is a predetermined result, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The storage unit stores the elapsed period of the effective period when the operation unit is operated and it is determined that the predetermined result is obtained. A specific effect is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means based on the total value of the elapsed periods stored in the storage means. Thereby, the player can give a privilege by operating the operation means at an earlier timing and setting it as a predetermined result when the effective period is set. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an interest by operating the operation means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

<Feature D group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player Means is a display means for displaying a selection display mode for displaying a plurality of selection candidates selectable by the player, an operation means operable by the player, and the selection display mode based on the operation of the operation means. Selection means for selecting at least one of the displayed selection candidates, period setting means for setting a valid period for validating the operation of the operation means, and the operation means are operated to select the selection candidate If you set When it is determined that the elapsed period is equal to or less than the predetermined period by the determination unit that determines the elapsed period of the valid period being selected, the display unit displays the selection even after the selection candidate is selected A game machine D1 having history display means for displaying selection candidates other than the selection candidate selected by at least the selection means, which are displayed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the display means displays a selection display mode in which a plurality of selection candidates selectable by the player are displayed. At least one of the selection candidates displayed in the selection display mode is displayed by the selection means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. When the operation means is operated and the selection candidate is selected, the elapsed time of the set effective period is determined by the determination means. When it is determined by the determination means that the elapsed period is equal to or less than the predetermined period, even after the selection candidate is selected, at least the selection candidate selected by the selection means is displayed on the display means in the selection display mode Selection candidates other than the above are displayed by the history display means. As a result, even if the operation means is operated in a short time after the selection display mode is displayed and it is difficult for the player to determine what the selection candidate is, it is possible to confirm the selection candidate. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game gets bored early.

<Feature E group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means sets period setting means for setting a valid period in which the operation of the operation means is determined to be valid over a period in which the game determined to be good or bad by the success or failure determination means is executed a predetermined number of times The counting means for counting the number of times the operation means is operated when the effective period is set by the means, and the number of times counted by the counting means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. There are gaming machine is characterized in that and a game information providing means for providing a specific game information to the player E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the subordinate control means, the period setting means sets an effective period in which the operation of the operation means is determined to be effective over a period in which the game determined to be acceptable by the success or failure determination means is executed a predetermined number of times. When the effective period is set by the period setting means, the number of times the operating means is operated is counted by the counting means. Specific game information is given to the player by the game information giving means based on the fact that the number counted by the counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. As a result, even when the player does not obtain the determination result of the bonus game for a predetermined number of times, specific game information is given by continuously operating the operation means, and the player can enjoy the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the slave control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation by the operation means, and a lottery information determination means for determining lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, The game information giving means is determined by the lottery information judging means that the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means is a specific result based on the fact that the predetermined number of times has been reached or more. A game machine E2 characterized by giving specific game information to a player.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the sub control unit, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the operation by the operation unit. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the lottery information determination means. When it is determined by the lottery information determination unit that the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit is the specific result based on the fact that the predetermined number of times or more has been reached, the specific game information is determined by the game information provision unit It is given to the player. Thereby, even when the operation means is operated a predetermined number of times or more, specific game information may not be given, and the timing at which the particular game information is given can be made random. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can provide a game having a fresh taste.

  In the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the gaming information giving means has a count value by the counting means that is less than a predetermined number of times in advance, based on having been determined as a specific result by the success or failure judgment result. A game machine E3 characterized by the provision of the specific game information.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the determination that the result is a specific result based on the result of the determination, the specific game information is given by the game information giving means even if the count value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing at which the specific game information is given can be made more random, and a novel impression can be given to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the main control means acquires the acquiring means for acquiring the propriety determination information in which the propriety determination is executed by the propriety determination means based on the establishment of the acquiring condition, and the acquiring means Success / reject judgment information storage means for storing the accepted / failed judgment information, prior success / reject judgment means for judging success / fail before the start condition is established, and the advance / reject judgment means prior to the establishment of the start condition. And a preliminary signal generation unit for generating an advance signal for notifying the sub control unit of the result of the determination by the appropriateness determination unit, and the game information giving unit stores the determination information based on the advance signal. The count value by the counting means is less than the predetermined number of times based on the fact that the means determines that the pass / fail judgment information as the predetermined result is stored. The gaming machine is characterized in that for applying the specific game information E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the acquisition condition, the success / failure determination information is acquired by the acquisition means in which the success / failure determination means is executed. The pass / fail judgment information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the pass / fail judgment information storage means. The success / failure determination information stored in the success / failure determination information storage unit is determined by the priori failure determination unit before the start condition is established. An a priori signal generation means is generated by the a priori signal generation means for notifying the secondary control means of the success or failure judgment result by the priori success or failure judgment means. Even if the count value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the predetermined game information is based on the fact that the advance determination information storage means stores the predetermined result determination information as the predetermined result. Is given by the game information giving means. Thereby, the player can expect a predetermined result by the specific game information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game expecting more specific game information to be displayed.

<Feature F group>
It has a main control means for executing control of a game and a slave control means for executing control of a game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is a lottery based on the establishment of the start condition. The acquisition means for acquiring information, the pass / fail judgment execution means for executing the judgment on the basis of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means Storage means, prior lottery determination means for determining the lottery information stored in the storage means prior to establishment of the lottery condition, and notification of the determination result by the prior Pre-signal generation means for generating pre-signals for the purpose, and the sub-control means indicates the result of determination on the basis of the determination based on the control signal from the main control means. Dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the prior signal, display means for displaying different information, dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information, and the prior signal Based on the prior discrimination means for discriminating the mode in advance and the discrimination result by the prior discrimination means, the time until the judgment result of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is discriminated In the time determined by the time discriminating means, the result of a plurality of acceptance / rejection determinations is displayed, the time discriminating means for performing the operation, the operation means operable by the player, and the valid period in which the operation by the operating means is determined to be effective. A game machine F1 having period setting means for setting over a period of time.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in the main control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. On the basis of the establishment of the lottery condition, the acceptance determination unit is executed by the acceptance determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. The lottery information stored in the storage means is judged by the prior yes or no judging means before the lottery conditions are satisfied. An a priori signal generation means is generated by the a priori signal generation means for notifying the secondary control means of the determination result by the priori success or failure determination means. In the secondary control means, based on the control signal from the main control means, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of the yes / no determination by the yes / no determination means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Based on the prior signal, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined in advance by the pre-determining means. Based on the determination result by the prior determination means, the time determination means determines the time until the result of determination of the judgment result of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed. The valid period during which the operation by the operating means operable by the player is determined to be valid is set by the period setting means over a period in which a plurality of success / failure determination results are displayed within the time determined by the time determining means. .

  As a result, since the effective period is set across the dynamic display mode in which the result of determination of success or failure is displayed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with more innovative effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the gaming machine at an early stage.

<Feature G group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means includes an operation means operable by the player, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and a length of the effective period set by the period setting means according to the size of the display area. Identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating the size, variable means for changing the size of the display area of the identification symbol so that the remaining effective period can be identified based on the passage of time, and the above The operating means is Based on the fact that it is operated within the effective period, the game information decision expedient which decides the game information grant expedient which grants the game information to the player, the game information which is granted by that game information grant expedient from the plural game information decision Means, storage means storing at least first game information and second game information different from the first game information as game information determined by the additional information determination means, and the effective period, Information period setting means for setting a first period in which first game information is easily selected and a second period in which the second game information is easily selected, and within the second period set by the information period setting means A game machine G1 comprising: identification information giving means for giving identification information that can be identified from the size of the display area of the identification symbol.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the period setting means sets an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The identification symbol indicating the length of the effective period set by the period setting unit is displayed by the identification symbol display unit according to the size of the display area. The size of the display area of the identification symbol is varied by the varying means so that the remaining effective period can be identified based on the passage of time. The game information is given to the player by the game information giving means based on the fact that the operation means is operated within the effective period. The game information given by the game information giving means is determined by the game information determining means from among the plurality of pieces of game information. At least the storage means stores first game information and second game information different from the first game information as game information determined by the additional information determination means. The information period setting means sets a first period in which the first game information is easily selected and a second period in which the second game information is easily selected among the effective periods. Identification information that can be identified from the size of the display area of the identification symbol that is within the second period set by the information period setting means is given by the identification information giving means. This makes it possible to notify that different game information is easily obtained at the timing when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game utilizing the operation means more effectively, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the slave control means is an enlarged display means for displaying the second period identification information in an enlarged manner as compared to that at the normal time based on the judgment that the success or failure judgment means is the predetermined result. A game machine D2 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1, the secondary control means normally uses the enlarged display means for the second period identification information based on the fact that the pass / fail judgment means judges that the predetermined result is obtained. Since the second period identification information is expanded because it is displayed larger than time, there is an effect that it is possible to expect the player to have a predetermined result as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  The gaming machine G1 or G2 is characterized in that the identification information giving device gives the second period identification information when it is determined that a predetermined lottery is performed and the giving condition is satisfied. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second period identification information is given by the identification information giving means when it is determined that the giving condition is satisfied by executing a predetermined lottery. Therefore, it is possible to randomly set the case where the second period information is given, and to provide the player with a game having a fresh taste.

<Feature H group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means displays, according to the control signal from the main control means, display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the success / failure determination means, and a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information displayed on the display means. A predetermined dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from the display modes, the operation means operable by the player, and the dynamic display mode determining means Based on the above A period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and the display of the operation display mode based on the fact that the operation means is operated within the effective period set by the period setting means Operation display means for displaying on the means, the period setting means including: a first effective period in which the operation display mode is displayed; and a second effective period set before the first effective period. A game machine H1 having at least a setting means, and a prohibition means for prohibiting the setting of the first effective period or the setting of the operation display mode within the second effective period. .

  According to the gaming machine H1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the secondary control means, in accordance with the control signal from the main control means, identification information indicating the determination result by the pass / fail determination means is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from among the plurality of dynamic display modes. Based on the fact that the predetermined dynamic display mode has been determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, a valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The operation display mode is displayed on the display means by the operation display means based on the fact that the operation means is operated within the effective period set by the period setting means. At least a first valid period in which the operation display mode is displayed and a second valid period set before the first valid period are set by the period setting means. Within the second validity period, the setting of the first validity period is prohibited or the setting of the operation display mode is prohibited by the prohibition means. As a result, since the setting of the first effective period or the setting of the operation display mode is prohibited, various games can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine H1, the prohibiting means prohibits setting of the first effective period or prohibits setting of the operation display mode when a predetermined operation is performed by the operation means within the second effective period. A game machine H2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the setting of the first valid period is prohibited or the setting of the operation display mode when the predetermined operation is executed by the operating means within the second valid period. Since the player is prohibited by the prohibiting means, the player can set the prohibition by operating the operation means, and it is possible to set according to the player's preference.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the bonus game is executed, the display means displays a bonus game display mode, and the operation display mode is displayed as the bonus game display mode. A gaming machine H3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the bonus game is executed, the bonus game display mode is displayed by the display means. The operation display mode is displayed as the bonus game display mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine H3, the bonus game display mode includes at least a bonus game start display mode indicating start of a bonus game and a bonus game in progress mode indicating that a bonus game is being executed, and the period setting means The present invention is characterized in that the second effective period is set in a period in which the bonus game start display mode is displayed, and the first effective period is set in a period in which the bonus game display mode is displayed. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exerted. That is, at least the bonus game display mode is configured by the bonus game start display mode indicating the start of the bonus game and the bonus game in-progress display mode indicating that the bonus game is being executed. The second effective period is set by the period setting means during the period when the bonus game start display mode is displayed. In addition, the period setting means sets a first effective period during a period during which the bonus game display mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to set whether to set prohibition to the start of the bonus game, and it is possible to concentrate on the subsequent bonus game and play the game.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (an example of slave control means)
223e Counting means S305 Pass / fail determination means S1004 Benefit game execution means S1404 Period setting means S1607 Probability setting means, Probability determination means S1608 Acquisition means S1609 Determination means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines and the like are known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen a fluctuation effect and a hit effect according to the lottery result. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Some of these types of pachinko machines, proposed the gaming machine to change the effect or the like of the game by the player the player to the gaming machine is provided with operable operating means (switch) operates the operation means It is done.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741

In this type of pachinko machines, Yu technique's there has been a problem that would come saturated in the game at an early stage.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game early.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has main control means for executing control of the game and slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means. The main control means performs a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination means capable of performing the determination and that the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result It has an execution unit, wherein the slave control means includes a player-operable operating means, based on the operation of the operation means, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information by the acquiring means a determination means capable of performing determination based on the acquired information, which can be determined that by the determination means displays an operation table示態like when it is determined that the predetermined result Display means and operation of the operation means A period setting means for setting a valid period to enable, on said display means the variable display corresponding to elapse of the valid period as the period display manner indicating at least a portion of said effective period set by the period setting means Even after the displayable period display means and the operation means are operated, information on the remaining period displayed in the period display mode corresponding to the operation can be displayed on the display means as the remaining period information And a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect when the remaining period information satisfies a specific condition .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the main control means for executing control of the game and slave control means for executing control of the game according to the control signal from the main control means, the main control means And a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination means capable of performing the determination and that the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. The slave control unit includes an operation unit operable by the player, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on an operation of the operation unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Determination means capable of performing determination based on the above, display means capable of displaying an operation display mode when the determination by the determination means is determined to be a predetermined result, and operation of the operation means Effective period to activate Period setting means for setting the period, and a period display mode capable of displaying a variable display corresponding to the lapse of the effective period as a period display mode indicating at least a part of the effective period set by the period setting means Means, and remaining information display means capable of displaying information on the remaining period displayed in the period display mode corresponding to the operation on the display means as remaining period information even after the operation means is operated And specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the remaining period information satisfies the specific condition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of SW production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of SW production displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a view schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (B) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the win in the special symbol, and (d) is a second random number counter C4 and the ordinary It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence with the hit in a symbol typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the lottery probability setting process 3 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of SW production displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of RAM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment It is the figure shown and (c) is a figure showing typically the contents of the display lottery table in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of the comment selection table in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the indicator setting data in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selective processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the mission setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the opening display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the big hit game in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol in the big hit game in the fourth embodiment It is a figure showing an example of a round display mode displayed on a display. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) shows the content of the opening display mode selection table in 4th Embodiment typically FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the opening process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting presentation processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process during a demonstration screen display performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart which shows transition of the background mode in a 5th embodiment, (b) is a timing chart which shows transition of a background mode in a modification of a 5th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of RAM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment It is a figure shown typically, and (c) is a figure showing typically the contents of the background change lottery table in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the timing chart in case the SW production in 6th execution is executed. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 6th embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 6th embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of RAM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the figure shown clearly, (c) is the figure which showed typically the content of the maximum value selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize command reception processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of ROM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the comment selection table in 7th Embodiment typically FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in an 8th embodiment. (A)-(b) is a figure showing the display mode of SW production displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in an 8th embodiment, and (c) is setting that SW production in an 8th embodiment is prohibited Is a timing chart in the case of It is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of MPU of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the opening process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 8 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of an opening display mode of a big hit game displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a modification of an 8th embodiment, and (b) is SW production in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 24C is a timing chart in the case of no SW in the eighth embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first) when the ball passes the second entrance 67. 2) The lottery will be held. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 , And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

  When it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", it becomes special game state (16R big hit) of 16 rounds in both, and if it is "big hit A", then the big hit ends as added value after the big hit end The pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the variation of the special symbol) until the next special symbol wins. Moreover, in "big hit B", the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times.

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol oddity), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to). On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal Indicates the condition (normal condition of special symbol). In addition, "time symbol of the ordinary symbol" (during the short period of the ordinary symbol) means that the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming state in which the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state" is called "ordinary symbol normal state", which indicates that the probability of hitting the symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during time saving. .

  Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol is referred to as a special variation state (probable change period) of the special symbol. In addition, during the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol after the big hit end of the special symbol, that is, between the end of the big hit B end until the lottery of the special symbol ends a predetermined number of times , It is referred to as a short period of time of the normal pattern.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are made common, depending on the type of the jackpot "time symbol The period of becoming a "state" is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or only a part of the type of jackpot may be changed. Also, for example, instead of changing the period in which the "time symbol of the normal symbol" is changed according to the type of jackpot, the time for opening the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64, or once The number of times of opening the motorized part may be changed in the hit of the normal symbol. Moreover, in this embodiment, after the big hit end, it becomes "high probability state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol", but after "high probability state of special symbol" is finished, "time symbol of normal symbol" "" May be configured.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the "big hit B" until the drawing of the special symbol is finished 100 times. The period may be set arbitrarily.

  It should be noted that while the "special symbol high probability state" is continued, when the special symbol big hit A is newly added, the "special symbol high probability state" is further added after the big hit of the new special symbol. It will be continued until the jackpot of the design.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, its big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) The special symbol (1st symbol) according to is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Moreover, if it is a "big hit A", the change display with which the main symbol to which "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" which is an odd number is added aligns is performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a combination of predetermined main symbols indicating a small hit (for example, on the effective line L1, a combination of main symbols from the left symbol row Z1 is "3" "4" “1”) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Continuing, with reference to FIG. 5, the display aspect of SW (switch) presentation performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5A is a view showing an example of the display mode of the SW effect in the present embodiment. The SW effect is selected and displayed as one of the notice display modes during the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern in which the main symbol for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol is fluctuated. This SW effect is set according to the type of the selected variation pattern when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected, and is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. Ru. Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 is selected and set in the process of S1404 of the command determination process (S1311 in FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 221.

  When the SW effect is set, the third symbol display device 81 imitates the frame button 22 while the variation pattern of the special symbol is being variably displayed (dynamically displayed), as shown in FIG. 5 (a). The symbol is displayed, and the character "SHIFT BEAT !!" is displayed to inform the player that the frame button 22 is pressed. Then, an indicator is displayed at the center of the third symbol display device 81, and based on the number of times the player presses the frame button 22, the memory of the indicator lights up and goes up, which is a scale of the maximum value " If the indicator rises (lights up) to the scale indicated as victory (see FIG. 5B), it indicates to the player that the special symbol in motion will be a big hit (predicting). In this case, the main symbol is reduced and is variably displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81 only with the number of the symbol.

  In addition, time to be displayed within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is determined in advance, and the SW effect is automatically changed to the display mode according to the fluctuation pattern of the main symbol when the time elapses.

  In the main controller 110, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), it is used as a trigger, a lottery of a special symbol is performed, and thereafter, the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37 The variable display of the symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the first symbol display device In accordance with the change display of 37, the change display of the third symbol is performed.

  I will explain the flow to the jackpot. When variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, first, high-speed variable display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) When has passed, it switches to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the stop display in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are aligned is performed, and the change effect is finished, and the big hit effect is subsequently started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the stop display where the main symbol (the third symbol) of the same number is not aligned is performed and the fluctuation effect is ended, and there is the start winning prize held. The next special symbol lottery is performed, and the next change presentation is started.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, or As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (5 round jackpot) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 18) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is special When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is the jackpot. In addition, this special symbol big hit random number table is for high probability of special symbol (period during the low probability state of special symbol) and high probability of high probability of becoming special jackpot from the low probability (special symbol) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "7" is the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability. . As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/30".

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 49” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. In addition, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 There is.

  In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, various kinds of "disappearing (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various, "disappearing special reach" "Various A, Big B, Big B C-common variation patterns are defined as" Shared Normal Reach "variety," Share Super Reach "variety," Shared Special Reach "variety, as a variation pattern for Big B A variety of “special reach” types are defined, and a variety of “common normal reach” types, “shared super reach types”, and “shared special reach types” are defined as variation patterns of hit / out-of-use sharing. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9 (d), the value of the random number corresponding to the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol per random symbol table 202c (see FIG. 9 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device When the value of the second random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number which becomes the normal set by the random number per symbol table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (d), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 8, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 18), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and time It has a counter 203 e and other storage areas.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as the drawing of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Are added (see S404 in FIG. 13). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 11).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 11 and S405 in FIG. 13). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 14).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S703 in FIG. 15: No).

  The time saving counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203 e is zero. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203e is set to zero, and a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control unit 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot Be done. That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the value according to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many the value of the time-and-time counter 203 e is.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "big hit B", the time saving counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 11). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished, until the value of the time counter 23e becomes 0 (S217 in FIG. 11).

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-sinking counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol based on a random symbol table for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 14).

  The other storage area 203z is an area in which various data and the like necessary for other games are stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  An SW effect pattern table 222 a is stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. Also, in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an SW depression frequency counter 223e, and a performance counter 223f, an SW effective time storage area 223g, and other storage area 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1409 in FIG. 21). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the setting of fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 22). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 21) and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1707 in FIG. 22).

  The SW depression frequency counter 223 e is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is depressed. In the SW depression frequency counter 223e, SW effect is set, and a value larger than 0 is stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g, that is, 1 is added each time the frame button 22 is depressed during the SW effective time. Ru. Specifically, one is added in the process of S1606 of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, in the processing of S1602 and S1614, the initial value is reset to 0. The value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is configured to be mainly used for setting of the lottery probability in the SW effect, and the like.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter value used for lottery of effects performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, selection of effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is a counter value updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated to the initial value 0 when it is further updated after being updated to the upper limit value 198. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is added and updated one by one.

  The SW effective time storage area 223 g is a storage area for storing an effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be effective. When the SW effective time is stored, it is subtracted and updated based on the passage of time of the SW effective time. When the valid time indicating a value larger than 0 seconds is stored in the SW valid time storage area 223g, it is determined that the SW valid time is being stored.

  The other storage area 223z is a storage area in which various data and the like necessary for other games are stored.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 21) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 are omitted because they are already known.

<About control processing by main controller 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 10 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and then, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance port 67 A process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 18) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S211: Yes), of the two types of big hit of the special symbol (big hit A, big hit B), it is determined what the big hit type is (S212), big hit type If is a jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the high probability gaming state (probable variation) (S213). If the jackpot type is the jackpot B, then 100 is set to the hour / minute counter 203e (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and the present process is ended. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S216, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. Be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is a special symbol off (S211: No),
It is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217). ), End this processing. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in transition (S302). If it is in a definite variation (S302: Yes), whether the jackpot of the special symbol is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability The lottery result of is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 30 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability change is not in progress (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the time of low probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. One of "7" is set as a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes these hits match, the special symbol is Determined to be a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first collision type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the big hit of the 3 types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B and jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R big hit, a definite symbol variation), and it is in the range of "50 to 99" If there is, it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, low probability state of special symbol, 100 symbols for a short period of time of normal symbol).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach", and "disappearing special reach" are defined. As the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B · jackpot C common, various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared special reach", etc. are defined, and as the variation pattern for jackpot C, "special" Various types of reach are specified, and various types of fluctuation patterns for hit and off-common use are defined as common normal reach, common super reach, and shared special reach.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the set stop type is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 18). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, for convenience of explanation, first, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described, and then, the delay prefetching process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), determines whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a starting winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 18) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, based on the values of the various counters acquired in the process of S406, the result of determination of the yes / no determination at the start of fluctuation is determined (S407). Here, the game state (certainly positive or normal) at the start of the change is determined to determine the result of the determination of the success or failure. It is determined whether the success or failure determination result executed in the process of S407 is a jackpot (S408). If it is determined that the success or failure judgment result is a jackpot (S408: Yes), a jackpot winning command is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure determination result is out of step (S408: No), an out winning combination command is set (S410).

  The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 18) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores the information in the prize information storage area 223a as prize information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602). If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-middle counter 203 e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S 608). The hour-time counter 203e is a counter indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203e is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203 e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 8 (b)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 8 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the current is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour and hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83 Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized part is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the motorized part is performed when the motorized part opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 18) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67, and when the ball passes. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the second ball entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained . Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance ball opening 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance ball opening 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S910, the rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (refer to FIG. 10), and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. In addition, the ball holding ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 11) or the start winning process (see FIG. 13) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning combination information command set in the start winning combination processing is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized product opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 (S1005). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S625 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 14), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19), the first symbol display is a variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 14), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 14), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up)

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 16 has been executed, so that the processing at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

<Control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 19, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1318 (see FIG. 20) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 20, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 20), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1318. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1318 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1318 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is performed (see S1317 in FIG. 20). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is performed, the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1204 to S1206 It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the process of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (effect) in S1302 to S1310, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1311, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1312 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. The frame button input monitoring and rendering process (S1307) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process shifts to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1311). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311), the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the command determination processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1403). Thereafter, based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and the SW effect pattern table (222a), a scenario of SW effect is selected, and the SW effective time set in the scenario is set (S1404). After that, it returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of times of suspension N of the variable display in is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1409 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1409 is the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main controller 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1408, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1408: No), it is next determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1410). When the winning information command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1411). Here, in the winning information storage area 223a, winning information as to the result of determination as to whether the balls are held or not and the type of jackpot are stored for each holding ball.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that no winning command has been received (S1410: No), a process according to other commands is executed (S1419).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the fluctuation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1312). The variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 performs variation effect production The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (ie, off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S1506. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 21). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1505). In the process of S1505, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to the process of S1506.

  In the process of S1506, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1506). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1506: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1507), and then in S1407 of the command determination process (see FIG. 20) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1508).

  In the process of S1509, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1307 in FIG. 23), first, it is determined whether the value stored in the SW effective time storage area 223g is a value larger than 0, that is, it is during SW effective time (S1601). It should be noted that this SW effective time indicates that it is a time to determine that the operation is effective when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. When it is determined in the process of S1601 that the SW effective time is not reached (S1601: Yes), the SW pressing frequency counter 223e is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1602). Thereafter, this process ends. The SW depression frequency counter 223 e is a counter value for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is depressed during the SW effective time. As described above, when the SW valid time is out, by resetting the SW pressed frequency counter 223 e to an initial value, it is possible to accurately count the SW pressed frequency during the SW valid time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the SW effective time is in progress (S1601: No), the value of the SW effective time storage area 223g is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (S1603). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1604). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1604 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1604: Yes), the SW effective time is acquired from the SW effective time storage area 223g (S1605).

  The value of the SW depression frequency counter 223 e is incremented by one and updated. Subsequently, a lottery probability setting process is executed (S1607). Here, in the lottery probability setting process (S1607), a process of setting the lottery probability in the lottery of the effect to be displayed based on pressing of the frame button 22 based on the current SW effective time is executed.

  Here, the lottery probability setting process (S1607) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the lottery probability setting process (S1607). In the lottery probability setting process (FIG. 24, S1607), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is one second or less (S1701). If it is determined that the remaining SW valid time is one second or less (S1701: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/2 (S1702). Here, when the lottery probability is set to 1⁄2, the value of 0 to 99 among the values of the effect counter 223 f (0 to 199) is set as the winning value.

  It is determined whether the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 20 or more (S1703). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 20 or more (S1703: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/1 (S1704). Here, all the values of the effect counter 223f are set as the winning value. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1703 that the SW depression frequency counter 223e is less than 20 (S1703: No), this process ends.

  Next, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the SW effective time is not 1 second or less, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 2 seconds or less (S1705). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 2 seconds or less (S1705: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1⁄4 (S1706). Here, among the values of the effect counter 223f, values from 0 to 49 are set as the winning value. It is determined whether the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 10 or more (S1707). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 10 or more (S1707: Yes), the lottery probability is set to 1/2 (S1708). Here, the same process as the process of S1702 is performed. Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is less than 10 (S1707: No), this process ends.

  When it is determined in the process of S1705 that the SW effective time is not 2 seconds or less (S1705: No), the lottery probability is set to 1/5 (S1709). Here, in the process of setting the lottery probability to 1⁄5, among the values of the effect counter 223f, values from 0 to 39 are set as the winning values. Thereafter, this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the remaining time of the SW effective time, the display mode is changed (in the present embodiment, the indicator shown in FIGS. A lottery probability is set to execute the lottery as to whether or not to raise. The lottery probability is set to increase the probability of winning as the SW effective time decreases. Thereby, when the frame button 22 is continuously operated during the SW effective time to raise the indicator shown in FIG. 5A, if there is a large remaining time of the SW effective time, the lottery probability of the win Is set low, the indicator can be difficult to ascend. On the other hand, when the SW effective time decreases, the winning lottery probability is set high, so that the indicator can be easily set to rise. Thus, the player can enjoy the effect of operating the frame button 22 by fully utilizing the SW effective time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the number of pressing times exceeds the predetermined number by the number of pressing of the frame button 22. It was configured to set a winning lottery probability high. As a result, for the player who continuously presses the frame button 22 in a short period of time, the hit probability is set high, and by operating the frame button 22 many times to the player, advantageous display is facilitated It can make you think. Thus, the player can enjoy playing a game by operating the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the indicator is displayed while the special symbol is being changed, and the player operates the frame button 22 to raise the indicator, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), when the indicator is raised to the scale indicated as victory, an example of the SW effect of notifying the player that the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit is shown and described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a special symbol (third symbol) is set as a jackpot A, and a jackpot B is set as a symbol that is difficult to identify, and a jackpot is notified by becoming an alley. Thereafter, an effect of continuously hitting the frame button 22 continuously for a fixed period is executed as to whether it is a jackpot A or a jackpot B, and a lottery is performed each time the frame button 22 is operated. If the player has won the lottery, it may be configured as a SW effect that informs the player whether it is a big hit A or a big hit B. Even in such a case, as in the present embodiment, by changing the lottery probability according to the SW effective time, the player can be made to produce an effect of pressing the frame button 22 by effectively using the SW effective time. it can.

  Furthermore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, since the lottery is performed each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the number of times the hit is determined to be hit can be made random. For example, it is determined to be hit 10 times. In some cases, it may be determined to be a hit on the first occasion, so that it is possible to perform an effect that gives the player unexpectedness. Therefore, various patterns can be enjoyed by the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When the lottery probability setting process (S1607) is executed, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired based on the lottery probability set in the process of the lottery probability setting process (S1607), and the lottery is executed (S1608). It is determined whether the lottery result is a hit (S1609). If the lottery result is out (S1609: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the success or failure determination result of the special symbol currently being changed is a big hit (S1610). If it is determined that the success or failure determination result is a big hit (S1610: Yes), it is determined whether one-shot notification is to be made (S1611). Here, it is determined that the value of the acquired effect counter is any of 0-5. When it is determined that one-shot notification is to be made (S1612: Yes), a display-use hit gauge effect command is set (S1612). Thereafter, the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is reset to 0, which is an initial value, and the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is reset to 0 (S1613). Thereafter, this process ends.

  In this way, the lottery for executing the effect is executed, and when winning, the lottery for one-shot notification is executed, and when the one-shot notification lottery is won, the indicator is raised to MAX and displayed The hit gauge effect command is set. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effect that the indicator becomes MAX (see FIG. 5B) suddenly. As a result, since the player can be provided with a surprising effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1611 that the one-shot notice lottery is out (S1611: No), the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is equal to or more than the upper limit (30 times or more in this embodiment). It is determined (S1614). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is equal to or greater than the upper limit (S1614: Yes), the processing of S1612 is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 5B, the indicator is raised to the scale indicated by victory, and it is notified that the indicator is a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1614, when the SW pressing frequency counter 223e determines that the number is smaller than the upper limit (S1614: No), the process of S1615 is executed. Further, in the process of S1610, when it is determined that the result of the determination is out of step (S1610: No), the process of S1615 is executed. In the process of S1615, a display gauge effect command indicating the scale of the indicator corresponding to the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is set (S1615).

  In the present embodiment, the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223 e is set to 1 to 5 with 1 to 5 divisions 2 to 10 with divisions 2 to 10 to 3 divisions 16 to 19 with divisions 4 to 20 for divisions 20 to 29. Ru. In the present embodiment, the indicator is raised according to the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e, but the present invention is not limited to this, up to the scale before the big hit (scale 5 in the present embodiment), It may be configured to be raised one by one each time a winning of the SW effect is won. By configuring in this manner, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed can be set so that the scale rises at random. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a different effect pattern every time. In the present embodiment, the process executed by the display control device 114 is a known process, and thus detailed illustration and description will be omitted.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the value of the number of times the frame button 22 is depressed (SW depression number counter 223e) is equal to or more than the predetermined number when the SW effective time becomes equal to or less than the predetermined time. For example, it differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to extend the SW effective time. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. There is. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The SW lottery extension flag 223 h is a flag indicating that the SW valid time is extended and set. The SW lottery extension flag 223 h is set to off in the initial state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the process of S1636 of the lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630 in FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, when the SW effective time is extended and set, it is set to ON. Also, it is set to OFF in the processing of S1620 and S1640 of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (FIG. 27, S1320).

Regarding Control Processing by Pachinko Machine 10 in Second Embodiment
Next, control processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is modified from the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the frame button input monitoring and effect process (FIG. 23, S1307) is changed to the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (FIG. 27, S1320) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S1320). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (FIG. 27, S1320) in the second embodiment is a lottery probability setting process (FIG. 23) with respect to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. 24, S1607) is changed to lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630), and processes of S1620 and S1640 are respectively added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1602, when the SW effective time is 0, the process of S1620 is executed after setting the SW depression frequency counter 223e to 0. In the process of S1620, the SW extension flag 223h is set to OFF (S1620). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Further, when the process of S1606 is executed, the lottery probability setting process 2 is executed (S1630). The lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the lottery probability setting process 2 (S1630).

  In the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less (S1631). If it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than 3 seconds (S1631: No), the lottery probability is set to 1/10 (S1632). Here, among the values of the effect counter 223f, values from 0 to 66 are set as the hit values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is 3 seconds or less (S1631: Yes), it is determined whether the SW lottery extension flag 223h is off (S1633). If it is determined that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is on (S1633: No), the processing of S1638 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1633 that the SW lottery extension flag 223h is off (S1633: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 30 or more (S1634). If it is determined that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is less than 30 (S1634: No), the processing of S1638 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1634 that the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e is 30 or more (S1634: Yes), 5 seconds are added to the SW effective time set in the SW effective time storage area 223g. Setting (S1635). The SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to ON (S1636). A display effective time extension command is set (S1637). By this command, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the indicator is increased by the indicator showing the SW effective time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that the SW effective time is increased, and the indicator is turned to the right Displayed in different colors. The added amount is displayed on the indicator in a display mode different in color or pattern as indicated by b, so that the player can easily recognize that the SW effective time has been extended. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, on the third symbol display device 81, a character is displayed to notify the player that the SW effective time "additional service !!" is added and extended. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the SW effective time has increased.

  In the process of S1638, the lottery probability is set to 1/3 (S1638). Thereafter, this process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the SW valid time is 3 seconds or less, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is determined. If the SW valid time is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the SW valid time is extended. As a result, the player who frequently presses the frame button 22 extends the SW effective time and further increases the period for operating the frame button 22. Therefore, it is more fun to operate the frame button 22. Can. On the other hand, for a player who does not operate the frame button 22 very much, the SW effective time is not extended, and the SW effective time ends. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that matches the style of the player's game.

  In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is extended when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is equal to or more than the predetermined number, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In some cases, it may be set to be extended more than in the case of being dislocated. In this case, a lottery may be performed regardless of the number of SW depressions or at a predetermined lottery probability based on the number of SW depressions, and the SW effective time may be extended when the lottery is won. By configuring in this manner, even a player playing a game without operating the frame button 22 operates the frame button 22 in anticipation of whether or not the success or failure judgment result is a big hit by extending the SW effective time. You can do it. Therefore, the taste of the game can be further improved and the player can be more entertained.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. When the process of S1613 is executed, the process of S1640 is executed. In the process of S1640, the SW lottery extension flag 223h is set to OFF (S1640). Thus, by setting the SW lottery extension flag to OFF after the SW effect is ended, it is possible to suppress the problem that the SW effective time is extended many times.

  Next, lottery probability setting processing 3 (S1650) will be described as a modification of the second embodiment with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing lottery probability setting processing 3 (S1650) in the modification of the second embodiment. The lottery probability setting process 3 (FIG. 29, S1650) in the modification of the second embodiment is the same as the lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630) in the second embodiment except that the process of S1637 is the process of S1657. has been changed. The processes of S1651 to S1656 and S1658 in lottery probability setting process 3 (FIG. 29, S1650) are the same as the processes in S1631 to S1636 and S1638 in lottery probability setting process 2 (FIG. 28, S1630) .

  In the process of S1657, a variable command for display is set which instructs to set the SW effective time display to 1/5. Thereby, the display control device 114 changes the indicator of the SW effective time according to the decrease of the SW effective time, but the variable speed is set to 1⁄5. As a result, as in the second embodiment, the variable speed (decreasing speed) of the indicator indicating the SW effective time is set to a low speed without displaying the indicator to increase, and the player is extended the SW effective time Can recognize what happened.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 37, a pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the SW effect is displayed and the SW effect is ended, the remaining time of the SW effective time is added, It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to provide the player with a special effect (in the present embodiment, a mission effect in the present embodiment) set by the remaining time of the SW effective time in the SW effect of one cycle. . The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30 (a)-(b), an example of the display mode displayed on 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 by SW production of the pachinko machine 10 in this 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. In FIG. 30 (a), the SW effect in the third embodiment is set, and the comment (character) indicating the expectation of the special symbol being changed is displayed by the player operating the frame button 22 during the SW effective time. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of being displayed. At the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol schematically showing the frame button 22 and an indicator M capable of identifying the remaining time of the SW effective time are displayed. The part indicated by a of the indicator indicates the remaining time of the SW effective time. Further, on the left side of the display mode of the indicator M, a time indicator T indicating a totalization situation of remaining time of SW effective time when the frame button 22 is pressed and the SW effect is finished is displayed. The remaining time of the SW effective time is added, and the indicator is turned clockwise according to the added time.

  FIG. 30 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the mission effect is executed in response to the total value of the remaining time of the SW effective time reaching the upper limit value. When the remaining time reaches the upper limit value, the word "Mission Entry" is displayed, and the word "Let's reach with 7 minutes within 3 minutes !!" is displayed, which indicates the contents of the mission. Thereby, the player can recognize that the success / failure determination result of the special symbol will be a big hit when the reach display mode is set with seven symbols. The remaining time of the SW effective time is the time indicated by a displayed by the indicator M when the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is easy for the player to recognize how much SW effective time remains. It can be done.

  As a result, the player presses the frame button 22 at an early timing in order to end the SW effect while leaving the SW effective time as much as possible when the SW effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player participate more in the game, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
The electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different from the electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the display lottery table 222c and the comment selection table 222d in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. And indicator setting data 222e are respectively added.

  The display lottery table 222 c is a data table for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined effect in the SW effect. FIG. 31 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the display lottery table 222c. The value of the effect counter 223f is allocated to each of the omission and effect of the effect drawing according to the success or failure judgment results of the special symbol during fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is configured so that it is easier to be judged as a hit than in the case of being out.

  The comment selection table 222d is a data table for selecting the display content of the comment preview (see FIG. 30A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the SW effect shown in FIG. 32A.

  The indicator setting table 222e is a data table for determining the display mode of the time indicator T corresponding to the total time of the remaining time of the SW effective time, as shown in FIG. 32 (b). A variable amount for changing the indicator display is set corresponding to the total remaining time. The color of the time indicator T is changed to the angle set by the indicator angle, and the total value of the remaining time can be recognized by the player.

  A remaining time storage area 223i and a mission flag 223j are added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, respectively.

  The remaining time storage area 223i is a storage area in which the remaining time of the SW effective time is stored. When the comment notice is set and the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the remaining time of the SW effective time at that time is stored in the remaining time storage area 223i.

  The mission flag 223 j is a flag indicating that a mission effect is being performed. When the mission effect is set, this mission flag 223 j is set to on.

  The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a view schematically showing a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol at a normal time (other than the mission effect). For each variation pattern, the value of the effect counter 223f is set, and when the value matches the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, a comment notice that is SW effect is set. FIG.33 (b) is a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of a special symbol, when a mission production is set. Even when the mission effect is set, there is no substitute for the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern, and only the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be the mission effect content. During the mission effect, the SW effect is not selected.

<About control processing by voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In the control process executed in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is compared with the command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) with respect to the first embodiment. (FIG. 23, S1307) has been changed to frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (FIG. 36, S1340). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a command determination process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 2 (S1330). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) in the third embodiment differs from the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1402 to S1404 are deleted and the process of S1420 is added. It is done. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, variation pattern selection processing (S1420) which is one processing in command determination processing 2 (FIG. 34, S1330) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection process (S1420).

  In the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 35, S1330), first, the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON (S1421). It is determined whether the mission flag 223 j is set to on (S 1422). If it is determined that the mission flag 223j is on (S1422: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table for missions (see FIG. 33B) based on the received command (S1423) . Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1422 that the mission flag 223j is off (S1422: No), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S1424). Here, the fluctuation pattern is selected (extracted) from the fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223f, the advance notice of the SW effect is determined, and the SW effective time is set (S1425). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired effect counter 223f matches the value of the effect counter 223f set in the selected variation pattern, and if it matches, the comment notice that is the SW effect is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S1340).

  In frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 36, S1340), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1661). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1661: Yes), it is determined whether the mission flag 223j is on (S1662). If it is determined that the mission flag 223j is on (S1662: Yes), the remaining time set in the remaining time storage area 223i is subtracted by the elapsed time (S1663). It is determined whether the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is 0 (S1664). If it is determined that the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is 0 (S1664: Yes), the mission flag 223j is set to OFF (S1665). On the other hand, if it is determined that the mission flag is off in the process of S1662 (S1662: No), if it is determined that the value stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is not 0 in the process of S1664 (S1664: No), finish this process.

  When it is determined in the process of S1661 that the SW effective time is not 0 (S1661: No), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1666). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1667). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1667: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1667 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1667: Yes), a display SW pressing command is set (S1668). By this command, the display control device 114 is notified that the frame button 22 has been pressed, and the display mode displayed by the display control device 114 is changed.

  The remaining time of the SW effective time is stored in the remaining time storage area 223i (S1669). The comment to be displayed is selected from the comment selection table 222d (see FIG. 32A) based on the value of the effect counter 223f and the result of the pass / fail determination (S1670). A display comment display command is set based on the comment selected in the process of S1670. A comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the display control device 114 by this command, and the comment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The SW valid time stored in the SW valid time storage area 223g is set to 0 (S1672). Thereafter, a mission setting process is executed (S1673), and this process is ended.

  This mission setting process (S1673) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this mission setting process (S1673).

  In the mission setting process (FIG. 37, S1673), first, it is determined whether the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223i is a value larger than 0 (S1731). If it is determined that the remaining time is a value greater than 0 (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining time is equal to or more than the upper limit (180 seconds or more in the present embodiment) (S1732). When it is determined that the remaining time is equal to or more than the upper limit (S1732: Yes), the time indicator T is set to MAX (S1733). The mission flag 223j is set to on (S1734). A display command indicating the display of the set indicator is set (S1735).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1732 that the remaining time is less than the upper limit (S1732: No), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired and the display lottery table 222c (see FIG. 31C) is executed. (S1736). It is determined whether the lottery result in S1736 is a hit (S1737: Yes), the processing of S1733 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the process of S1736 is out in the process of S1737 (S1737: No), the time indicator T based on the remaining time is set (S1738). Thereafter, the process of S1735 is performed, and the process ends. When it is determined in the process of S1731 that the remaining time is 0, the time indicator is set to 0 (S1739), and then the process of S1735 is executed.

  As described above, when the SW effect is executed, the remaining time of the SW effective time is added and stored at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the special effect is executed in that time. Furthermore, by executing the display lottery, by winning the display lottery even if the total remaining time does not exceed the upper limit value, an indicator indicating the total remaining time is displayed on MAX (maximum), and special effects are produced. Configured to be set. This display lottery, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), is set so that it is easy to be determined as a hit if the one that is to be a big hit is included in the pending storage, so a special effect (mission effect) By being executed, the player can be expected to become a jackpot. Therefore, it is easy to play a game so as to operate the frame button 22 with as much of the remaining SW effective time as possible, and it is possible to urge the player to participate in the SW effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of selection display modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 to select one of them. In this case, in order to prevent the frame button 22 from being operated continuously and not knowing what candidates were present other than the selected display mode, the frame button is displayed within a predetermined time after the selection display mode is displayed. When the selection operation is determined by the operation of the button 22, the selected display mode and the other displayed candidates are distinguished and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the form. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 38, in the opening display that is the start of the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment, the effect of the display mode for selecting the weapon used in the effect display in the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 38 (a) shows an example of a selection display mode of the weapon selected by the player in the opening display mode when the game is a big hit. In the present embodiment, in addition to the frame button 22, operation buttons (not shown) for enabling left and right selection operations are provided on both sides of the frame button 22. The operation button is electrically connected in the same manner as the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the frame button 22.

  In this embodiment, in the jackpot game, in the jackpot game, the effect to fight the enemy is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the round display during the jackpot game, and the jackpot type is the jackpot A when the hero wins the battle. An effect of notifying the player of is performed. The player can select the weapon used by the main character in the battle. In the example of FIG. 38A, three of a saber, a cannon and a dynamite are displayed, and a cursor indicating selection is displayed below it. When the operation button is operated, the cursor moves to the left and right to switch the selection of the weapon. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the weapon on which the cursor is displayed is selected.

  Here, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed at the start of the jackpot game, or when the frame button 22 is mistakenly pressed as the operation button, weapon selection is executed in a short time, There was a problem that it was not possible to know what was displayed in the other candidates. In such a case, for example, in the case where the expectation of being the jackpot A is set to be different depending on the type of the selectable weapon candidate, the display of the candidate is determined by the game It is very important information for the

  Therefore, when the selection is determined in a short time (within 1 second in the present embodiment) after the selection display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that they can be distinguished from the displayed candidates.

  With such a configuration, even if the player determines the selection in a short time without confirming the selection display mode well, it is possible to confirm what candidates have been displayed. In addition, since the candidate is not displayed when the player selects after taking a certain amount of time or more, the third symbol display device 81 can always display the candidate, which can prevent the inconvenience of becoming annoying. .

<Electric Configuration in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment, an opening display mode selection table 222 f is added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The opening display mode is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot. In this embodiment, in the opening display, as shown in FIG. 38A, the selection display mode of the weapon used for the battle effect in the jackpot game is selected as the opening display mode.

Regarding Control Process in Fourth Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, in the first embodiment, detailed processing of the jackpot control processing (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process.

  In the jackpot game process (FIG. 40, S1004), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot start timing is not reached (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the large opening direction 65 is released (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65 is satisfied (S1107). The closing condition of the large opening 65 determines whether the opening time (30 seconds) has elapsed or whether ten large game balls have won in the large opening 65. If it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65 is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the large opening 65 is closed (S1108).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65 is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), this process is ended.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control processing in the fourth embodiment, the command determination processing (FIG. 21, S1311) is compared with the first embodiment, and the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 41, S1350) , S1307) has been changed to frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (FIG. 43, S1360). The other processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a command determination process 3 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (S1350). In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 41, S1350) in the fourth embodiment, each process up to S1412 to S1413 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined in the process of S1410 that a winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1412). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1412: Yes), the opening process is executed (S1413). Thereafter, this process ends. This opening process (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S1413).

  In the opening process (FIG. 42, S1413), first, based on the value of the effect counter 223f, an opening effect display mode is selected from the opening effect display mode selection table 222f (see FIG. 39) (S1511). A display command indicating the selected opening effect display mode is set. The opening display mode selected on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed by this command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S1360).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (FIG. 43, S1360), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1681). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1681: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1681 that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1681: No), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1682). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1683). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated within one second (S1684). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed within one second (S1684: Yes), a display command to display the selection candidate on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1685). On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed within one second (S1684: No), the processing of S1686 is executed.

  In the process of S1686, a display command indicating the candidate selected by the cursor is set (S1686). After that, the SW effective time is reset to 0 (S1687), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1683 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1683: No), it is determined whether the operation button (not shown) is operated (S1688). If it is determined that the operation button has been operated (S1688: Yes), a display command for moving and displaying the cursor in the direction corresponding to the operation is set (S1689). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1688 that the operation button 22 is not operated (S1688: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated within one second after the SW effective time is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the selection candidate displayed in the opening display mode. Is set as Therefore, even when the player mistakenly operates, it is possible to identify what is displayed in the selection display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a customer waiting effect process (S1305) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect process (S1305).

  In the customer waiting effect processing (FIG. 44, S1305), first, it is determined whether or not a demonstration screen display is being executed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1521). If it is determined that the demonstration screen display is displayed (S1521: Yes), processing during the demonstration screen display is executed (S1522). The process during demonstration screen display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this demonstration screen display processing (S1522).

  In the process during demonstration screen display (FIG. 45, S1522), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1531). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1531: Yes), display of the setting screen is set (S1532). A display command for notifying the display control unit 114 of the display of the set setting screen is set (S1533).

  Here, with respect to the battle effect that is displayed during the jackpot game, the setting screen is a button for operating the ground battle fighting in the background of the ground and the underwater battle fighting in the background of the sea as shown in FIG. And the frame button 22 to set according to the preference of the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a display mode that matches the player's preference during the jackpot game, and it is possible to further entertain the player. In addition, the effects can be diversified, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1531 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1531: No), the progress counter is incremented by 1 (S1534). Although the elapsed counter is not shown, it is a counter set in the other storage area 223z of the RAM of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is for counting the elapsed time since the demonstration screen is displayed. It is a thing.

  It is determined whether the elapsed counter is the upper limit value (five minutes in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the progress counter is the upper limit (S1535: Yes), the progress counter is reset to the initial value (S1536), and the setting of the battle effect is set to default (in this embodiment, ground battle). (S1537). A display command indicating the content set in the process of S1537 is set (S1538). Thereafter, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1535 that the progress counter is less than the upper limit value (S1535: No), this process ends. The elapsed counter is reset to 0, which is an initial value, when the setting of the demonstration screen is released.

  Thus, when the demonstration screen is set, the elapsed time is measured. Then, when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time, the setting set for the pachinko machine 10 is set as a default. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 determines that the game is over, and the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 is reset by the frame button 22 to the default setting. Therefore, when a new player starts playing a game, the player can play the game in the state set by default, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, when setting is input to the pachinko machine 10, the setting screen is displayed based on pressing of the frame button 22 in the state of the demo screen, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to have a dedicated interface for setting.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated across a plurality of changes in a predetermined period is stored, and the background is set when the number becomes a predetermined number. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the mode is changed. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Regarding the Timing Chart of Mode Switching in the Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a timing chart in switching of the background mode using the frame button 22 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 (a) shows that the frame button 22 is 50 times between the number of times the special symbol changes 10 times to 20 times (after the initial setting is made) after the jackpot game or the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The timing chart in the case of changing a background mode from beach mode to underwater mode based on having been pressed is shown. In the configuration of the second embodiment, a lottery for a predetermined background change is executed at a timing when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 10 to 20 and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 50 times, When the lottery is won, the background mode is switched from the beach mode to the underwater mode. Even when the player loses the lottery, the lottery is executed again at the timing when the 51st time is pressed, and it is determined whether to change the background or not.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 46 (b) shows a modification of the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is counted while the number of times the variation of the special symbol is 10 to 20 times, and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the number of times the variation of the special symbol becomes 20 times. If the number of times the SW is pressed is 50 or more, the lottery for background change is executed, and if it is won, the mode is switched to the underwater mode, but if it is less than 50 times or if it falls out of 50 times or more The beach mode is configured to continue.

  The period for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed may be notified so as to be understood by the player, or it may be configured to draw a random period by lottery so as not to be understood by the player. Good. In addition, when the thing that becomes the big hit is stored among the result of the decision of the holding ball of special symbol being held, if you push the frame button 22 more than a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period, the background mode is switched You may configure it. In addition, without notifying the jackpot A, jackpot B, it is difficult to understand whether the current state is a probability variation gaming state or a normal gaming state, and in a definite variation gaming state, in a predetermined period, The background mode may be switched when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times or more.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery to determine whether to switch the background mode is performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the background mode may be changed without fail if it is pressed a predetermined number of times or more.

  By configuring in this manner, by pressing the frame button 22 across a plurality of changes in the special symbol, the player is provided with information that is advantageous to the player, such as the result of determination of success or failure and the current gaming state. Can be configured to improve the taste of the game.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 110 are changed from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, a background change lottery table 222g is added to the first embodiment.

  The background change lottery table 222g is a data table for executing a lottery as to whether or not to switch the background mode. FIG. 47C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the background change lottery table 222g. The value of the effect counter 223f is allocated separately to change the background mode or not to change, depending on whether or not the winning prize information for the big hit is stored in the winning prize information of the holding ball stored in the prize information storing area 223a. ing. The probability of being drawn if the background is changed is set to a higher probability than when no information is stored in the case where information that becomes a big hit is stored in the winning information.

  As a result, when the background mode is changed, the player can play a game with expectation that what is to be a big hit is stored in the special symbol held. Therefore, by continuously pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to identify information on the result of determination of the acceptance ball's acceptance or rejection, so that the player may be reminded to join the game using the frame button 22. it can. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, a fluctuation number counter 223k and a background change counter 223m are respectively added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment.

  The fluctuation number counter 223k is a counter for counting the fluctuation number of the special symbol after the big hit game or after the power is turned on. The fluctuation number counter 223k is incremented by one and updated in the process of S1430 of the command determination process 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, based on having received the opening command, it resets to 0 which is an initial value. Also, when the power is turned on, an initial value of 0 is set in the initial setting.

  The background change counter 223m is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in a predetermined predetermined period (in the present embodiment, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 10 to 20). . The background change counter 223m is updated by adding 1 in the process of S1692 of the background change process (S1690 in FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. Although illustration is omitted, when an opening command is received, it is reset to 0 which is an initial value. When the power is turned on, an initial value of 0 is set by the initial setting.

Regarding Control Processing in Fifth Embodiment
Next, control processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is the command determination process 4 (FIG. 48, S1370), and frame button input monitoring / rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) Are respectively changed to frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (FIG. 49, S1380). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the command determination processing 4 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 4 (S1370). The command determination process 4 (FIG. 48, S1370) in the fifth embodiment has the process of S1430 added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the process of S1404 is executed, the value of the fluctuation number counter 223k is incremented by one and updated (S1430). As described above, since the value of the fluctuation number counter 223k is updated based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, it is possible to accurately count the fluctuation number of the special symbol.

  Next, referring to FIG. 49, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S1380) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S1380). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process 5 (FIG. 49, S1380) in the fifth embodiment is a background changing process (S1690) with respect to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment. Has been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S1601 that the SW effective time is 0 (S1601), the background change process is executed (S1690). Here, this background change processing (S1690) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the background change process (S1690 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1691). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1691: Yes), the value of the background change counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S1692). It is determined that the value of the background change counter 223m is equal to or more than the upper limit value (50 or more in the present embodiment) (S1693).

  If it is determined that the value is less than the upper limit value (S1693: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the background change counter 223m is equal to or more than the upper limit (S1693: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired and the background is changed from the background change lottery 222g (see FIG. 47C). A lottery is executed (S1694). It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S1694 is a hit (with background change) (S1695). When it is determined that the lottery result is out (no background change) (S1695: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a hit (S1695: Yes), the corresponding background mode is set (S1696). In the present embodiment, since the background mode of the beach mode and the underwater mode is set, the other background mode different from the currently set background is set. A display command indicating the set background mode is set (S1697). The background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched by the display control device 114 by this command.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the determination result of the special symbol stored on hold from the prize information storage area 223a is discriminated, and the discrimination result straddles the variation of the plurality of special symbols. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the SW effect to be executed is executed. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About Setting SW Valid Time in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, setting of the SW effective time of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which the SW effective time is set when the special symbol is changing and the third holding ball is established in a state where two holding balls are stored. The judgment result of the third holding ball is a big hit, and the SW effective time is set over the fluctuation of the third holding ball special symbol from the fluctuation of the first holding ball special symbol. In addition to the setting of the SW effective time, the SW effect shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is set. As the SW effect, an indicator is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 52 (a), and the frame button 22 is depressed to perform an effect of raising the indicator.

  While the special symbol corresponding to the first holding ball shown in FIG. 51 is being changed, a display mode as shown in FIG. 52 (a) is displayed. In this case, the special symbol (third symbol) is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), even when the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the first holding ball has passed and the stop display is performed, the effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22 is continuously displayed. Ru.

  Thereafter, even when the change of the second holding ball shown in FIG. 51 is started, an effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed as shown in FIG. 53 (a). During this time, the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time is displayed by gradually decreasing. FIG. 53 (b) shows the display mode of the SW effect when the second holding ball is stopped and displayed. In addition, although mentioned later in detail, the rise limit of an indicator is defined for every change of each special symbol, and based on pressing of frame button 22, it is constituted so that it may rise and may be displayed.

  FIG. 54 (a) shows the display mode of the SW effect when the special symbol corresponding to the third holding ball shown in FIG. 51 is changing. When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the indicator is raised and displayed up to MAX, which is the maximum value, and the player is informed in advance that the success or failure judgment result is a big hit. Ru.

  As described above, in the configuration according to the present embodiment, the SW effect is displayed across the variations of the plurality of special symbols, and therefore discouraging discouragement against the variation of the special symbols out of which the determination result is false Then, it can be expected to have a jackpot against the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, since the SW effect is set across a plurality of changes, the SW effect can have a margin, and various effects can be performed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a display lottery table 222c and a maximum value selection table 222h are added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in addition to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. There is.

  Since the display lottery table 222c (see FIG. 31C) has the same configuration as that described above in the third embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The maximum value selection table 222h is a selection table for setting the maximum value of the indicator of each variation in the SW effect. FIG. 55 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the maximum value selection table 222h. The scale of the maximum value is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f for each variation in accordance with the result of the determination.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a SW effect flag 223n is added to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. The SW effect flag 223 n is a flag indicating that the SW effect is set. The SW effect flag 223n is set to ON when the SW effect is set in the processing of S1458 in the winning command reception process (S1450 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. Be done. In addition, it is set to off in the process of S1740 of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530).

  The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Control Process in Sixth Embodiment
Next, control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. FIG. In the sixth embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the frame button in the command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) in the first embodiment. The input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) is changed to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the command determination process 5 (S1390) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 5 (S1390). The command determination process 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) in the sixth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1411 is changed to the process of S1450. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, winning command reception processing (S1450) which is one of command determination processing 5 (FIG. 56, S1390) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process (S1450).

  In the winning command reception process (FIG. 57, S1450), first, winning information of the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S1451). It is determined whether the SW effect flag 223 n is on. If it is determined that the SW effect flag 223n is on (S1452: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effect flag 223n is off (S1452: No), whether the number of holding balls is three or more, and whether the first holding ball and the second holding ball pass / fail judgment result It discriminates (S1453). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is less than 3 or at least one of the first holding ball and the second holding ball is a big hit (S1453: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1453 that the holding balls are three or more and the first holding balls and the second holding balls are out of judgment (S1453: Yes), the effect counter 223f The value is acquired, and the SW lottery of whether or not the SW effect is to be executed is executed from the display lottery table 222c (S1454). In the process of S1454, it is determined whether the lottery result is a hit (S1455). If it is determined that the lottery result is a hit, the SW effective time corresponding to the holding ball that has become compatible with the SW effect is set (S1456). A display command for the selected SW effect is set (S1457). The SW effect flag 2233 n is set to on (S1458). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1455 that the lottery result is out (S1455: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, when a winning command indicating that a holding ball has been established is received, a SW effect is set across a plurality of variations based on the number of holding balls and the result of determination of whether they are reserved or not. . As a result, the player can enjoy a plurality of changes as one effect, and the result of the judgment on the acceptability is out of view, and the change of the special symbol can also be enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the SW effect is set when the holding balls are three or more balls. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and two or one holding balls may be used. By configuring in this way, even with a small number of holding balls, it is possible to enjoy a plurality of variations as one effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 6 (S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 6 (S1530). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process 6 (FIG. 58, S1530) in the sixth embodiment is the same as the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) in the first embodiment in S1707, S1740, and S1750. Each process is added, and the processes of S1610 to S1615 are deleted.

  After the process of S1602 is performed, the process of S1740 is performed. In the process of S1740, the SW effect flag 223n is set to OFF (S1740). After the process of S1606 is performed, the process of S1707 is performed. In the process of S1707, it is determined whether the indicator of the SW effect currently displayed is rising to the maximum value set for fluctuation (S1707). If it is determined that the indicator has the maximum value (S1707: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the indicator is not the maximum value, the processing of S1607 is executed.

  When it is determined in the process of S1609 that the lottery result is a hit (S1609: Yes), the value of the indicator is set based on the value of the SW depression frequency counter 223e, and the display showing the indicator is displayed A gauge effect command is set (S1750).

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time causes the instruction display mode s indicating the pressing timing of the frame button 22 to be displayed to the player. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is configured to execute an effect for instructing the timing of pressing. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60, the display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the SW effect of this embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 displays a symbol schematically showing the frame button 22, and the position where the indicator M shows the indication display mode s to the player "stop the indicator in a circle !!" A display mode is displayed that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 at the changed timing. In this case, the special symbol is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right of the display area.

  The indicator M is the left area a of the indication display area s (the remaining time of the SW effective time is smaller than that of the indication display area s), the indication area b corresponding to the inside of the indication display area s, and the right area c of the indication display area s ( The remaining time of the SW effective time is longer than that of the instruction display area s. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is determined which area the indicator M corresponds to, that is, which area the remaining time of the SW effective time corresponds.

  FIG. 59 (b) is a display mode showing an example when a comment display is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed in the instruction area b. When the frame button 22 is pressed in the instruction area b, comment contents having a higher expectation to the jackpot than the other display areas are selected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60A, in the SW effect, when the indicator M approaches the vicinity of the instruction display area s, an enlargement effect is displayed in which the instruction display area is enlarged and displayed. As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the indicator M is enlarged and displayed as compared to the normal time, and the variable speed of the indicator M is also set slower than the normal time. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the indicator M is located in the instruction display area, the characters “PLEASE !!” are displayed to guide the player to press the frame button 22. As a result, the player can further press the frame button 22 at the timing when the indicator M is changed into the instruction display area s. Further, in the present embodiment, this enlargement effect is more easily selected than in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol in the variable display is a big hit, so the SW effect has an expectation of a big hit more Can be enjoyed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in the Seventh Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, a display lottery table 222 c and a comment selection table 222 d are respectively added to the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The display lottery table 222c has the same configuration as that described in the third embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The comment selection table 222 d is a data table for selecting a comment of SW effect. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), comment content is set for each left side area a (a zone), designated area b (b zone) and right side area c (c zone). In addition, the presence or absence of the enlargement effect is set for each SW effect.

<Regarding Control Processing in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the frame button in the command determination process 6 (FIG. 62, S1560) in the first embodiment. The input monitoring and rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) is changed to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 7 (FIG. 63, S1550). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the command determination processing 6 (S1560) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 6 (S1560). The command determination process 6 (FIG. 62, S1560) in the seventh embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1404 is changed to the process of S1460. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the processing of S1403, the processing of S1460 is performed. In the process of S1460, the SW effect is selected from the comment selection table 222d (see FIG. 61B), and the corresponding SW effective time is set (S1460).

  Next, referring to FIG. 63, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 7 (S1550) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 7 (S1550).

  In frame button input monitoring / effect processing 7 (FIG. 63, S1550), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1551). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1551: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is a value larger than 0 (S1551: No), the SW effective time is subtracted (S1552). A display command corresponding to the SW effective time is set (S1553). This command changes the indicator M based on the remaining time of the SW valid time.

  It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1554). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S1554: Yes), a comment corresponding to the current SW effective time is set (S1555). Here, the corresponding comment is selected based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed from the comment selection table 222 d. A display command indicating the set comment is set (S1556).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1554 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1554: No), it is determined whether the effect is with enlargement (S1557). If it is determined that the effect is with enlargement (S1557: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to execute the enlargement effect (S1558). If it is determined that it is time to execute the enlargement effect (S1558: Yes), a display command indicating the enlarged display is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect is not for enlargement (S1557), and when it is determined that it is not the timing for the enlargement effect (S1558: No), this process ends.

  As described above, the player displays the indicator M indicating the remaining time of the SW effective time, and uses the indicator M to instruct the player the pressing timing of the frame button 22, whereby the player can display the frame button 22. You can enjoy the game you used more. Furthermore, when the player can operate the frame button 22 at the timing instructed by the player, the player is more likely to be given a display mode (game value) higher in value than the normal, so the player is more instructed It is possible to play a game aiming to press the frame button 22 at the timing when it is done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect such that the indicator M is enlarged is performed, the player is not changing even for the player who does not press the frame button 22 even if the display by the SW effect is performed. It is possible to inform the degree of expectation for the success or failure judgment result of special symbol. Therefore, the taste of the game can be further improved.

<About Pachinko Machine 10 in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70, a pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the configuration has been described in which the SW effective time can be effectively used by configuring the lottery probability of the SW effect to be variable according to the SW effective time.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the battle effect is executed in the round display mode during the big hit game, and the player normally performs the frame button 22 in the 15th round display mode if it is normal. Although the SW effect to be pressed is displayed, in the opening display mode, by pressing the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times, the SW effect of the 15th round can be set so as not to be set in the first embodiment. This is different from the pachinko machine 10. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About the display mode of the SW effect in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65, a display mode of the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing an opening display mode indicating that the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, the player is informed by a battle effect whether the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the round display mode of the 15th round, a display mode for instructing the player to operate the frame button 22 is displayed. Then, when the player presses the frame button 22, a display mode in which the outcome of the battle effect is determined is displayed, and when the main character wins the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the jackpot A of the 16th round which is the final round. The display mode which shows that it is is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the player presses the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times or more during the opening display mode shown in FIG. 64 (a), as shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the 15th round display mode, the SW effect is displayed. It is not displayed, but a display mode indicating an explosion is displayed, and then a display mode for reporting the outcome of the battle effect is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a display mode for notifying the jackpot type in the final round is displayed.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to set the player who does not like the SW effect to prohibit the SW effect from being displayed by operating the frame button 22 at the start of the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect more tailored to the player. Further, in the opening display mode, since the display mode such as the setting can not be displayed but can be set by the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to provide the player with the fun for the player to find out the setting not notified. A player can be made to play a game.

  FIG. 65C shows a timing chart of the setting for prohibiting the SW effect in the present embodiment. When the period of the opening display mode is started, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is counted. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22 30 times or more, the setting of the SW effect set in the 15th round is prohibited.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a skip flag 223p of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The skip flag 223 p is a flag indicating that the setting of the SW effect of the 15th round is set to be prohibited in the battle effect during the big hit game. This skip flag 223p is displayed during the opening display of the big hit game in the process of S1589 of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 8 (FIG. 70, S1580) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment. When the frame button 22 is pressed 30 times or more, it is set to ON. Although illustration is omitted, it is set to off based on the end of the jackpot game.

<Control Process by Pachinko Machine 10 in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) is the command determination process 7 (FIG. 67, S1570), and frame button input monitoring / rendering process (FIG. 23, S1307) Are respectively changed to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (FIG. 70, S1580). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the command determination process 7 (S1570) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 (S1570). In the command determination process 7 (FIG. 67, S1570) in the eighth embodiment, the processes of S1412, S1414, S1470, and S1480 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 21, S1311) in the first embodiment. There is. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S1410 that no winning command has been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1412). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S1412: Yes), the opening process 2 is executed (S1470). Thereafter, this process ends.

  The opening process 2 (S1470) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the opening process 2. In the opening process 2 (FIG. 68, S1470), first, the SW effective time is set to 30 seconds (S1471). A display command instructing opening display is set (S1472). Thus, the SW effective time is set along with the execution of the opening process. The SW effective time set in this case is 10 seconds. In the present embodiment, the SW effective time is 10 seconds, which is the length of the opening display mode. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be a partial length of the opening display mode. Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the period which presses and sets frame button 22 by an opening display mode, it is not restricted to it, 1st round may be sufficient, and another round may be sufficient.

  Also, for the player who is playing by pressing the frame button 22 before the start of the 15th round and before the 15th SW effect is displayed, the SW effect is not displayed. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the SW effect from becoming meaningless to the player.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1412 that the opening command has not been received (S1412: No), it is determined whether a round command has been received (S1414). If it is determined that a round command has been received (S1414: Yes), a round process is performed (S1480), and then this process ends.

  Here, the round process (S1480) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this round processing (S1480).

  In the round process (FIG. 69, S1480), first, it is determined whether the received round command is a command indicating the 15th round (S1481). If it is determined that the command indicates the 15th round, it is determined whether the skip flag 223p is off (S1482). If it is determined that the skip flag 223p is off (S1482: Yes), a 15-round display mode with SW effect is set (S1483). Then, the SW effective time corresponding to the display mode is set. A display command corresponding to the set display mode is set (S1485).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1482 that the skip flag 223p is on (S1482: No), a 15-round display mode without SW effect is set (S1486). Thereafter, the process of S1485 is executed to end this process. When it is determined in the process of S1481 that the received round command is a command other than the 15th round (S1481: No), a round display mode corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1487). Thereafter, the process of S1485 is executed to end this process.

  As such, by setting the skip flag 223p to ON, round display without setting of the SW effect is set. Therefore, the player can prohibit the setting of the SW effect by operating the frame button 22 in the opening display mode, and can provide the player with the effect according to the player's preference.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (S1580) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (S1580).

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (FIG. 70, S1580), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is 0 (S1581). If it is determined that the SW effective time is 0 (S1581: Yes), the SW depression frequency counter is set to 0 (S1582), and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not 0 (S1581: No), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated (S1583). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1584). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1584: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1584: Yes), the value of the SW pressing frequency counter 223e is incremented by one and updated (S1585). It is determined whether the opening display is in progress (S1586). If it is determined that the opening display is being performed (S1586: Yes), it is determined whether the number of SW depressions is 30 or more (S1587). If it is determined that the number of times the SW is pressed is 30 or more (S1587: Yes), the skip flag 223p is set to ON (S1588), the SW valid time is reset (S1589), and this process is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times the SW is pressed is less than 30 times (S1588: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1586 that the opening is not being displayed (S1586), an effect to be displayed is selected based on the jackpot type (S1590). A display command indicating the selected effect is set (S1591). The SW effective time is reset (S1592), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the SW effect is displayed, the player performs the predetermined operation using the frame button 22 at the timing before the SW effect is performed, thereby prohibiting the display of the SW effect ( It can be canceled. Therefore, the player can set an effect according to the player's preference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening display mode, it is configured to set the display and non-display of the SW effect by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When a SW effect is selected for a pattern etc., the display of the SW effect is prohibited (display or non-display setting) by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 before the SW effect is displayed. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to execute effects tailored to the player.

  Next, a modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing an opening display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the player operates the operation button (not shown) configured with the cross key to move the cursor displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the BGM is output during the big hit game. Select the type of

  Here, also in the present embodiment, the display mode of the battle effect is displayed during the jackpot game as the round display mode as in the above-described eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed in the opening display mode and the type of BGM is selected, the SW effect of the 15th round is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71C, in the opening display mode, when the player does not select BGM, the SW effect of the 15th round is not set. As described above, by setting the presence or absence of the SW effect by the operation in the opening display mode, it is possible to display the effect according to the player's preference. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting of the SW effect can be performed without displaying the dedicated display mode for setting the SW effect, the setting screen and the like, so that the control load can be reduced. In addition, by displaying such a setting screen, it is possible to suppress a problem in which an effect or the like during a big hit is interrupted.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot effect has been described as an example, but it may be configured such that such a setting can be made by the effect of the variation pattern of the special symbol or the notice effect selected accompanying it. .

<Other Embodiments>
Next, other embodiments will be described. In the above-described embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured by a press-type switch. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the frame button 22 is changed to the following configuration. A touch sensor type liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) is disposed on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. Cover the liquid crystal display with a transparent clear cover made of resin. The clear cover is pivotally supported at one end on the gaming machine side, and an elastic member with the clear cover biased upward is disposed at the other end side, so that the upper tray can be slightly moved up and down. It is fixed to By pressing the upper portion of the clear cover, the clear cover is configured to approach the liquid crystal display device side. Then, when the clear cover is pressed and moved downward, the transmission type detection switch is arranged to be turned on. The detection switch is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, and is configured such that the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can determine that the clear cover has been pressed. In addition, the display control of the liquid crystal display device is controlled by the display control device 114. Furthermore, the input signal of the touch sensor provided in the liquid crystal display device is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 81 is displayed on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, and the clear cover that covers the liquid crystal display device 81 functions as a button.

  By configuring in this manner, the liquid crystal display device can be provided not only in the third symbol display device 81 but also in the upper tray 17. By configuring the liquid crystal display device to be a button, the upper tray 17 can be provided. The liquid crystal display device and the frame button can be provided in a space-saving manner by utilizing the above space.

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the clear cover is pressed to approach the liquid crystal display device, the touch sensor can detect the finger or the like of the player pressing the clear cover or the clear cover. With such a configuration, pressing of the clear cover can be detected without providing a detection switch for detecting the clear cover. In addition, with regard to the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 81, it is possible to perform an operation such as selecting by touching over the clear cover, and it is possible to improve the playability of the game. Here, by allowing the touch operation of the liquid crystal display device only when the clear cover is pressed, it is possible to suppress the problem that the touch operation is performed when the player does not intend.

  Further, by notifying the liquid crystal display device 81 of the timing (effective time) of pressing the clear cover or displaying an effect by pressing the clear cover, the game property can be further improved. In addition, by displaying the history of jackpots, the reliability of the notice, etc., the special symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if it can not be displayed during the game, it is displayed on this liquid crystal display device. It can be confirmed. Therefore, various information can be confirmed without stopping the firing of the game ball and interrupting the game. Further, by displaying the cross key or the like on the liquid crystal display device, the cursor or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be moved by the touch operation. Therefore, not only the pressing operation but also the selecting operation can be performed in a space saving manner.

  Furthermore, since the liquid crystal display device is covered with the clear cover, the liquid crystal display device can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, since the functions of the liquid crystal display and the frame button are combined, the player can be disposed at the most easily viewable position. Also, by being displayed on this liquid crystal display device, it is possible to enjoy the effect without hesitation to the left and right players etc. (it is difficult to be overlooked).

  Next, the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) will be described. When it is an effect that the clear cover (frame button) is pressed, the characters "PUSH" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and it is informed that it is the timing (effective time) to press the clear cover. Then, when the clear cover is pressed, the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. The contents displayed here are displayed in the same manner as the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at that time. Then, effects and the like by pressing the clear cover in the remaining display areas are displayed.

  With this configuration, pressing the clear cover (frame button) suppresses the problem that the line of sight moves to the clear cover and the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are overlooked it can.

  Although the content of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in part of the display region of the liquid crystal display device in the above description, it may be displayed in the entire display region.

Next, a modification of the configuration of the frame button 22 will be described. A frame button is an unemployed transparent sphere structure, and a projection means for projecting an image inside the sphere is disposed below the sphere. The projection means is constituted by a projector or the like, and can display an image which looks three-dimensionally from the outside of the sphere. Also, the sphere is
Both ends are pivotally supported so that the player can rotate the sphere.

  In addition, the spheres are colored hemispherically in green transmission color and purple transmission color, and when the player is rotated, the amount of rotation is known. In addition, it has a detection sensor which detects the amount of rotation, and by rotating the sphere, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display mode displayed inside the sphere can be varied. It is configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, both ends of the sphere are pivotally supported to be rotatable, but the sphere is put into a case body that is rotatably fixed and is rotated in various directions like a track ball. May be possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to rotate the ball by hand. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be automatically rotated by a motor or the like. With this configuration, the degree of expectation can be notified by the rotation of the sphere, and the display mode of the display mode displayed inside the sphere can be changed. Moreover, as a structure which can push down a spherical body, you may comprise so that it can utilize as a frame button.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may integrate each apparatus 113,114 instead, and may provide them as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the voice lamp control unit 113 instructs the display control unit 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Further, all or a part of the configuration of each of the above embodiments may be combined.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means includes an operation means operable by the player, an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation of the operation means, and a determination means for performing determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means A display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when it is determined that the determination means has a predetermined result, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and a predetermined means by the determination means result The probability setting means for setting the probability to be determined and the probability set by the probability setting means are variably determined according to the timing at which the operation means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means A game machine A1 characterized by having probability determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is a predetermined result, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The probability that the determination means determines that the predetermined result is obtained is set by the probability setting means. The probability set by the probability setting means is changed by the timing at which the operation means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means, and is determined by the probability determination means. As a result, the probability of achieving a predetermined result is varied according to the timing of operation even within one valid period, so that random effects can be performed. Therefore, various effects of the game can be made, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A1 includes counting means for counting the number of times the operating means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means, and the probability determining means performs the operation within one valid period. When the probability is determined at the timing when the means is operated, if the count value by the counting means is a predetermined number or more, the probability determined as the predetermined result is higher than the probability determined based on the timing A game machine A2 characterized by being set.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the counting means counts the number of times the operating means is operated within the one effective period set by the period setting means. When the probability is determined at the timing when the operation means is operated within the valid period of 1, if the count value by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, the probability determined as the predetermined result is It is set higher than the probability determined based on it. Therefore, when the number of times the player operates the operation means is large, it can be felt that the operation effect display mode is easily displayed, and there is an effect that it is possible to have an interest by operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a gaming machine A3 characterized in that the effective period is set by combining periods having different probabilities determined by the probability determining means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the effective period is set by combining the periods in which the probabilities determined by the probability determining means are different from one another. There is an effect that the probability can be changed and set depending on the timing at which the user operates the operation means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a non-probability period in which the probability determining means does not have a probability of becoming a predetermined result based on the operation of the operating means in the effective period. The game machine A4 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the operation means is operated, the probability determination means sets the non-probability period in which the probability that there is no probability of becoming a predetermined result is set as the effective period. There is an effect that it can be operated.

  In any one of the gaming machine A1 to the gaming machine A4, the probability determining means sets the probability of being determined as a predetermined result to be higher as the remaining period of the effective period decreases. .

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the remaining period of the effective period decreases, the probability that the predetermined result is determined is set higher by the probability determining means. As a result, the player can be made to operate the operation means until the effective period is reduced, and there is an effect that the game can be played using the operation means.

<Feature B group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means includes an operation means operable by the player, an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation of the operation means, and a determination means for performing determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means A display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when the determination means determines that the predetermined result is obtained, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and the operation means being operated , Said Based on the storage means for storing the remaining period of the effective period when it is determined to be a fixed result, and the total value of the remaining period stored in the storage means being equal to or more than a predetermined value, A game machine B1 comprising: special effect means for displaying on display means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is a predetermined result, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The operation means is operated, and the remaining period of the effective period when it is determined that the predetermined result is stored by the storage means. The specific effect is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means based on the fact that the total value of the remaining periods stored in the storage means has become equal to or greater than the predetermined value. As a result, when the player sets the valid period, the player can store the remaining remaining valid period by operating the operation means at an earlier timing and setting the result as the predetermined result. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an interest by operating the operation means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the main control means acquires acquisition means for acquiring the propriety determination information for which the propriety determination is executed by the propriety determination means based on establishment of the acquisition condition, and the propriety determination information acquired by the acquisition means Means for storing the pass / fail judgment information storing means for storing the pass / fail judgment information stored in the pass / fail judgment information storage means, and the pass / fail decision means for deciding upon the pass / fail Prior signal generation means for generating a prior signal for notifying the secondary control means of the determination result, and the specific effect means, based on the prior signal, outputs a predetermined result to the acceptance determination information storage means Even when the total value stored in the storage unit is less than the predetermined value based on the determination that the corresponding determination information is stored, the specific effect is displayed on the display unit Gaming machine B2, characterized in that is for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the acquisition condition, the success / failure determination information is acquired by the acquisition means in which the success / failure determination means is executed. The pass / fail judgment information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the pass / fail judgment information storage means. The success / failure determination information stored in the success / failure determination information storage unit is determined by the priori failure determination unit before the start condition is established. An a priori signal generation means is generated by the a priori signal generation means for notifying the secondary control means of the success or failure judgment result by the priori success or failure judgment means. Even when the total value stored in the storage unit is less than the predetermined value based on the determination that the success / failure determination information as the predetermined result is stored in the success / failure determination information storage unit by the advance signal, the specific effect Is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means. Thereby, the player can expect a predetermined result by the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game expecting a more specific effect to be displayed.

  In the game machine B1 or B2, a game machine B3 characterized in that the specific effect is displayed over a period in which a plurality of acceptance / rejection determination results are indicated.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a specific effect is displayed over a period in which a plurality of acceptance determination results are indicated, so the player is determined Can be easily determined as one success / failure determination result, and it is possible to provide fresh effects.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, a game machine B4 characterized in that the specific effect is displayed in a display time corresponding to the total value stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B1 to B3, a specific effect is displayed in the display time corresponding to the total value stored in the storage means, so the player is stored in the storage means There is an effect that the total value of the remaining period of the effective period can be recognized.

<Feature C group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means includes an operation means operable by the player, an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation of the operation means, and a determination means for performing determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means A display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when the determination means determines that the predetermined result is obtained, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and the operation means being operated , Said Specific effect means for displaying a specific effect on the display means based on the storage means for storing the elapsed period of the effective period when it is determined to be a fixed result, and the total value of the elapsed periods stored in the storage means And a game machine C1 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is a predetermined result, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The storage unit stores the elapsed period of the effective period when the operation unit is operated and it is determined that the predetermined result is obtained. A specific effect is displayed on the display means by the specific effect means based on the total value of the elapsed periods stored in the storage means. Thereby, the player can give a privilege by operating the operation means at an earlier timing and setting it as a predetermined result when the effective period is set. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an interest by operating the operation means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

<Feature D group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player Means is a display means for displaying a selection display mode for displaying a plurality of selection candidates selectable by the player, an operation means operable by the player, and the selection display mode based on the operation of the operation means. Selection means for selecting at least one of the displayed selection candidates, period setting means for setting a valid period for validating the operation of the operation means, and the operation means are operated to select the selection candidate If you set When it is determined that the elapsed period is equal to or less than the predetermined period by the determination unit that determines the elapsed period of the valid period being selected, the display unit displays the selection even after the selection candidate is selected A game machine D1 having history display means for displaying selection candidates other than the selection candidate selected by at least the selection means, which are displayed in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the display means displays a selection display mode in which a plurality of selection candidates selectable by the player are displayed. At least one of the selection candidates displayed in the selection display mode is displayed by the selection means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. When the operation means is operated and the selection candidate is selected, the elapsed time of the set effective period is determined by the determination means. When it is determined by the determination means that the elapsed period is equal to or less than the predetermined period, even after the selection candidate is selected, at least the selection candidate selected by the selection means is displayed on the display means in the selection display mode Selection candidates other than the above are displayed by the history display means. As a result, even if the operation means is operated in a short time after the selection display mode is displayed and it is difficult for the player to determine what the selection candidate is, it is possible to confirm the selection candidate. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game gets bored early.

<Feature E group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means sets period setting means for setting a valid period in which the operation of the operation means is determined to be valid over a period in which the game determined to be good or bad by the success or failure determination means is executed a predetermined number of times The counting means for counting the number of times the operation means is operated when the effective period is set by the means, and the number of times counted by the counting means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. There are gaming machine is characterized in that and a game information providing means for providing a specific game information to the player E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the subordinate control means, the period setting means sets an effective period in which the operation of the operation means is determined to be effective over a period in which the game determined to be acceptable by the success or failure determination means is executed a predetermined number of times. When the effective period is set by the period setting means, the number of times the operating means is operated is counted by the counting means. Specific game information is given to the player by the game information giving means based on the fact that the number counted by the counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. As a result, even when the player does not obtain the determination result of the bonus game for a predetermined number of times, specific game information is given by continuously operating the operation means, and the player can enjoy the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, the slave control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on an operation by the operation means, and a lottery information determination means for determining lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, The game information giving means is determined by the lottery information judging means that the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means is a specific result based on the fact that the predetermined number of times has been reached or more. A game machine E2 characterized by giving specific game information to a player.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the sub control unit, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the operation by the operation unit. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is determined by the lottery information determination means. When it is determined by the lottery information determination unit that the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit is the specific result based on the fact that the predetermined number of times or more has been reached, the specific game information is determined by the game information provision unit It is given to the player. Thereby, even when the operation means is operated a predetermined number of times or more, specific game information may not be given, and the timing at which the particular game information is given can be made random. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can provide a game having a fresh taste.

  In the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the gaming information giving means has a count value by the counting means that is less than a predetermined number of times in advance, based on having been determined as a specific result by the success or failure judgment result. A game machine E3 characterized by the provision of the specific game information.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the determination that the result is a specific result based on the result of the determination, the specific game information is given by the game information giving means even if the count value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing at which the specific game information is given can be made more random, and a novel impression can be given to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the main control means acquires the acquiring means for acquiring the propriety determination information in which the propriety determination is executed by the propriety determination means based on the establishment of the acquiring condition, and the acquiring means Success / reject judgment information storage means for storing the accepted / failed judgment information, prior success / reject judgment means for judging success / fail before the start condition is established, and the advance / reject judgment means prior to the establishment of the start condition. And a preliminary signal generation unit for generating an advance signal for notifying the sub control unit of the result of the determination by the appropriateness determination unit, and the game information giving unit stores the determination information based on the advance signal. The count value by the counting means is less than the predetermined number of times based on the fact that the means determines that the pass / fail judgment information as the predetermined result is stored. The gaming machine is characterized in that for applying the specific game information E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the acquisition condition, the success / failure determination information is acquired by the acquisition means in which the success / failure determination means is executed. The pass / fail judgment information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the pass / fail judgment information storage means. The success / failure determination information stored in the success / failure determination information storage unit is determined by the priori failure determination unit before the start condition is established. An a priori signal generation means is generated by the a priori signal generation means for notifying the secondary control means of the success or failure judgment result by the priori success or failure judgment means. Even if the count value by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the predetermined game information is based on the fact that the advance determination information storage means stores the predetermined result determination information as the predetermined result. Is given by the game information giving means. Thereby, the player can expect a predetermined result by the specific game information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game expecting more specific game information to be displayed.

<Feature F group>
It has a main control means for executing control of a game and a slave control means for executing control of a game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is a lottery based on the establishment of the start condition. The acquisition means for acquiring information, the pass / fail judgment execution means for executing the judgment on the basis of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means Storage means, prior lottery determination means for determining the lottery information stored in the storage means prior to establishment of the lottery condition, and notification of the determination result by the prior Pre-signal generation means for generating pre-signals for the purpose, and the sub-control means indicates the result of determination on the basis of the determination based on the control signal from the main control means. Dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the prior signal, display means for displaying different information, dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information, and the prior signal Based on the prior discrimination means for discriminating the mode in advance and the discrimination result by the prior discrimination means, the time until the judgment result of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is discriminated In the time determined by the time discriminating means, the result of a plurality of acceptance / rejection determinations is displayed. A game machine F1 having period setting means for setting over a period of time.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in the main control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. On the basis of the establishment of the lottery condition, the acceptance determination unit is executed by the acceptance determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. The lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. The lottery information stored in the storage means is judged by the prior yes or no judging means before the lottery conditions are satisfied. An a priori signal generation means is generated by the a priori signal generation means for notifying the secondary control means of the determination result by the priori success or failure determination means. In the secondary control means, based on the control signal from the main control means, the display means displays identification information indicating the result of the yes / no determination by the yes / no determination means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Based on the prior signal, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means is determined in advance by the pre-determining means. Based on the determination result by the prior determination means, the time determination means determines the time until the result of determination of the judgment result of the identification information corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed. The valid period during which the operation by the operating means operable by the player is determined to be valid is set by the period setting means over a period in which a plurality of success / failure determination results are displayed within the time determined by the time determining means. .

  As a result, since the effective period is set across the dynamic display mode in which the result of determination of success or failure is displayed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with more innovative effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the gaming machine at an early stage.

<Feature G group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means includes an operation means operable by the player, a period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and a length of the effective period set by the period setting means according to the size of the display area. Identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating the size, variable means for changing the size of the display area of the identification symbol so that the remaining effective period can be identified based on the passage of time, and the above The operating means is Based on the fact that it is operated within the effective period, the game information decision expedient which decides the game information grant expedient which grants the game information to the player, the game information which is granted by that game information grant expedient from the plural game information decision Means, storage means storing at least first game information and second game information different from the first game information as game information determined by the additional information determination means, and the effective period, Information period setting means for setting a first period in which first game information is easily selected and a second period in which the second game information is easily selected, and within the second period set by the information period setting means A game machine G1 comprising: identification information giving means for giving identification information that can be identified from the size of the display area of the identification symbol.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the slave control means, the period setting means sets an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The identification symbol indicating the length of the effective period set by the period setting unit is displayed by the identification symbol display unit according to the size of the display area. The size of the display area of the identification symbol is varied by the varying means so that the remaining effective period can be identified based on the passage of time. The game information is given to the player by the game information giving means based on the fact that the operation means is operated within the effective period. The game information given by the game information giving means is determined by the game information determining means from among the plurality of pieces of game information. At least the storage means stores first game information and second game information different from the first game information as game information determined by the additional information determination means. The information period setting means sets a first period in which the first game information is easily selected and a second period in which the second game information is easily selected among the effective periods. Identification information that can be identified from the size of the display area of the identification symbol that is within the second period set by the information period setting means is given by the identification information giving means. This makes it possible to notify that different game information is easily obtained at the timing when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game utilizing the operation means more effectively, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the slave control means is an enlarged display means for displaying the second period identification information in an enlarged manner as compared to that at the normal time based on the judgment that the success or failure judgment means is the predetermined result. A game machine D2 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1, the secondary control means normally uses the enlarged display means for the second period identification information based on the fact that the pass / fail judgment means judges that the predetermined result is obtained. Since the second period identification information is expanded because it is displayed larger than time, there is an effect that it is possible to expect the player to have a predetermined result as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  The gaming machine G1 or G2 is characterized in that the identification information giving device gives the second period identification information when it is determined that a predetermined lottery is performed and the giving condition is satisfied. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second period identification information is given by the identification information giving means when it is determined that the giving condition is satisfied by executing a predetermined lottery. Therefore, it is possible to randomly set the case where the second period information is given, and to provide the player with a game having a fresh taste.

<Feature H group>
It has a main control means for executing control of the game and a slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means performs the game based on the establishment of the start condition. The sub-control in which the sub-control is performed based on the fact that the propriety determination means performs the propriety determination of the sub-steps, and the bonus game execution means performing the bonus game that is advantageous to the player The means displays, according to the control signal from the main control means, display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result by the success / failure determination means, and a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information displayed on the display means. A predetermined dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from the display modes, the operation means operable by the player, and the dynamic display mode determining means Based on the above A period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means, and the display of the operation display mode based on the fact that the operation means is operated within the effective period set by the period setting means Operation display means for displaying on the means, the period setting means including: a first effective period in which the operation display mode is displayed; and a second effective period set before the first effective period. A game machine H1 having at least a setting means, and a prohibition means for prohibiting the setting of the first effective period or the setting of the operation display mode within the second effective period. .

  According to the gaming machine H1, in the main control means, on the basis of the establishment of the start condition, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the secondary control means, in accordance with the control signal from the main control means, identification information indicating the determination result by the pass / fail determination means is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from among the plurality of dynamic display modes. Based on the fact that the predetermined dynamic display mode has been determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, a valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The operation display mode is displayed on the display means by the operation display means based on the fact that the operation means is operated within the effective period set by the period setting means. At least a first valid period in which the operation display mode is displayed and a second valid period set before the first valid period are set by the period setting means. Within the second validity period, the setting of the first validity period is prohibited or the setting of the operation display mode is prohibited by the prohibition means. As a result, since the setting of the first effective period or the setting of the operation display mode is prohibited, various games can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine H1, the prohibiting means prohibits setting of the first effective period or prohibits setting of the operation display mode when a predetermined operation is performed by the operation means within the second effective period. A game machine H2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the setting of the first valid period is prohibited or the setting of the operation display mode when the predetermined operation is executed by the operating means within the second valid period. Since the player is prohibited by the prohibiting means, the player can set the prohibition by operating the operation means, and it is possible to set according to the player's preference.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the bonus game is executed, the display means displays a bonus game display mode, and the operation display mode is displayed as the bonus game display mode. A gaming machine H3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the bonus game is executed, the bonus game display mode is displayed by the display means. The operation display mode is displayed as the bonus game display mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine H3, the bonus game display mode includes at least a bonus game start display mode indicating start of a bonus game and a bonus game in progress mode indicating that a bonus game is being executed, and the period setting means The present invention is characterized in that the second effective period is set in a period in which the bonus game start display mode is displayed, and the first effective period is set in a period in which the bonus game display mode is displayed. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exerted. That is, at least the bonus game display mode is configured by the bonus game start display mode indicating the start of the bonus game and the bonus game in-progress display mode indicating that the bonus game is being executed. The second effective period is set by the period setting means during the period when the bonus game start display mode is displayed. In addition, the period setting means sets a first effective period during a period during which the bonus game display mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to set whether to set prohibition to the start of the bonus game, and it is possible to concentrate on the subsequent bonus game and play the game.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine is proposed in which the gaming machine is provided with operation means (switches etc.) operable by the player and the player operates the operation means to change the effects of the game etc. It is done.
In such pachinko machines, for example, there is a machine that executes a lottery to change the game effect when the operating means is operated, in order to perform various effects when the player operates the operating means. (For example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-075741).
In this type of pachinko machine, the game effect is changed at a certain timing etc. by the operation of the player, and the player has a monotonous impression on the game, and the player gets bored early in the game. There was a point.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a player from getting bored with a game at an early stage.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has main control means for executing control of the game and slave control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means. The main control means is a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the success / failure determination means for executing the game success / failure determination based on the establishment of the start condition and that the success / failure determination result is a predetermined result. A bonus game execution means for executing a game, the slave control means includes an operation means operable by the player, an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the operation of the operation means, and the acquisition means A determination unit that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the user, a display unit that displays an operation effect display mode when the determination unit determines that the predetermined result is obtained, and the operation of the operation unit is validated. Set effective period Period setting means, probability setting means for setting the probability that the judgment means determines that the result is a predetermined result, and probability set by the probability setting means within one valid period set by the period setting means And probability determination means for changing and determining the timing according to the timing at which the operation means is operated.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, further comprising counting means for counting the number of times the operating means has been operated within a valid period of 1 set by the period setting means, The probability determining means determines the predetermined result if the count value by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times when determining the probability at the timing when the operation means is operated within one valid period. The probability is set higher than the probability determined based on the timing.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the main control means, the success or failure judgment of the game is executed by the success or failure judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the success / failure determination result being a predetermined result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means.
In the slave control means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the result is a predetermined result, the operation effect display mode is displayed on the display means. A valid period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the period setting means. The probability that the determination means determines that the result is a predetermined result is set by the probability setting means. The probability set by the probability setting means is changed by the timing at which the operation means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means, and is determined by the probability determination means.
As a result, the probability of achieving a predetermined result is varied according to the timing of operation even within one valid period, so that random effects can be performed. Therefore, various effects of the game can be made, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the counting means counts the number of times the operating means is operated within the one effective period set by the period setting means. When the probability is determined at the timing when the operation means is operated within the valid period of 1, if the count value by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, the probability determined as the predetermined result is It is set higher than the probability determined based on it.
Therefore, when the number of times the player operates the operation means is large, it can be felt that the operation effect display mode is easily displayed, and there is an effect that it is possible to have an interest by operating the operation means.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (an example of slave control means)
223 i remaining time storage area (storage means)
S305 Pass / Fail Judgment Means S1004 Benefit Game Execution Means S1404 Period Setting Means
S1423 identification effect means S1608 acquisition means S1609 determination means

Claims (2)

Main control means for executing game control;
And secondary control means for executing control of the game in accordance with a control signal from the main control means,
The main control means
Success or failure judgment means for executing a game's success or failure judgment based on the establishment of the start condition;
And a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player based on the result of the success or failure determination being a predetermined result.
The slave control means
Operation means operable by the player;
Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the operation of the operation means;
A determination unit that executes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Display means for displaying an operation effect display mode when the determination means determines that the predetermined result is obtained;
Period setting means for setting an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means;
Probability setting means for setting the probability of being judged as a predetermined result by the judgment means;
The apparatus is characterized by further comprising probability determining means for changing and determining the probability set by the probability setting means according to the timing at which the operation means is operated within one valid period set by the period setting means. A gaming machine to be. It has counting means for counting the number of times the operation means has been operated within one valid period set by the period setting means,
The probability determining means determines the predetermined result if the count value by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times when determining the probability at the timing when the operation means is operated within one valid period. 2. A gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the probability is set higher than the probability determined based on the timing.

Images